Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 PDF

1 of 302
1 of 302

Summary of Content for Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 PDF

VOLVO S40

Owners Manual Web Edition

DEAR VOLVO OWNER THANK YOU FOR CHOOSING VOLVO

We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo is one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo has also been designed to satisfy all current safety and environmental requirements.

In order to increase your enjoyment of the car, we recommend that you familiarise yourself with the equipment, instructions and mainte- nance information contained in this owner's manual.

Table of contents

4 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

00 00 Introduction

Important information............................... 10 Volvo and the environment....................... 13

01 01 Safety

Seatbelts................................................... 18 Airbag system........................................... 21 Airbags...................................................... 22 Activating/deactivating the airbag*........... 24 Side airbags (SIPS bags).......................... 26 Inflatable Curtain (IC)................................ 28 WHIPS....................................................... 29 When the systems deploy......................... 31 Crash mode.............................................. 32 Child safety............................................... 33 02

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars.................. 44 Overview, right-hand drive cars................ 46 Driver's door control panel....................... 48 Combined instrument panel...................... 49 Indicator and warning symbols................. 50 Information display................................... 54 Electrical socket........................................ 56 Lighting panel........................................... 57 Left-hand stalk switch............................... 60 Right-hand stalk switch ........................... 63 Cruise control*.......................................... 65 Keypad in the steering wheel* ................. 67 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warn- ing flashers................................................ 68 Parking brake............................................ 69 Power windows......................................... 70 Windows, rearview and door mirrors........ 72 Power sunroof* ........................................ 76 Personal preferences................................ 78

HomeLink *.............................................. 81

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 5

03 03 Climate control

General information on climate control..... 86 Manual climate control, AC....................... 88 Electronic climate control, ECC*............... 91 Air distribution........................................... 94 Fuel-driven engine block heater and pas- senger compartment heater*.................... 95 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)......... 98

04 04 Interior

Front seats ............................................. 102 Interior lighting........................................ 104 Storage spaces in the passenger com- partment ................................................. 106 Rear seat................................................. 110 Cargo area.............................................. 112

05 05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade......... 116 Active locks............................................. 119 Privacy locking* ...................................... 120 Keyless drive*.......................................... 122 Battery in remote control key.................. 125 Locking and unlocking ........................... 126 Child safety locks.................................... 129 Alarm* .................................................... 130

Table of contents

6 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

06 06 Starting and driving

General.................................................... 136 Refuelling................................................ 138 Alcoguard * ........................................... 142 Starting the engine ................................. 146 Starting the engine Flexifuel................. 148 Keyless drive*.......................................... 150 Manual gearbox...................................... 151 Automatic gearbox.................................. 152 Brake system.......................................... 157 DSTC Stability and traction control sys- tem* ........................................................ 159 Park Assist*............................................. 161 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System . 163 Towing and recovery.............................. 166 Start assistance...................................... 168 Driving with a trailer................................ 169 Towing equipment* ................................ 171 Detachable towbar* ............................... 173 Loading................................................... 177 Adjusting headlamp pattern ................... 178

07 07 Wheels and tyres

General.................................................... 182 Tyre pressure.......................................... 186 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * ...... 189 Changing wheels.................................... 192 Emergency puncture repair* .................. 194

08 08 Car care

Cleaning.................................................. 200 Touching up paintwork .......................... 204 Rustproofing........................................... 205

Table of contents

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 7

09 09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service........................................... 208 Self-maintenance.................................... 209 Bonnet and engine compartment........... 210 Oils and fluids......................................... 212 Wiper blades........................................... 217 Battery..................................................... 218 Replacing bulbs ..................................... 220 Fuses...................................................... 226 10

10 Infotainment system

General.................................................... 236 Audio functions....................................... 238 Radio functions....................................... 242 CD functions .......................................... 247 Menu structure audio system.............. 250 Phone functions*..................................... 251 Menu structure phone*......................... 258 Bluetooth handsfree* ............................. 261 11

11 Specifications

Type designation..................................... 270 Dimensions and weights......................... 272 Engine specifications.............................. 275 Engine oil................................................ 276 Fluids and lubricants............................... 278 Fuel......................................................... 280 Electrical system..................................... 283 Type approval......................................... 285 Symbols in the display............................ 286

Table of contents

8

12 12 Alphabetical Index

Alphabetical Index.................................. 290

Table of contents

9

Introduction

Important information

10 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reading the Owner's Manual

Introduction

A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. This will give you the opportunity to familiarise yourself with new functions, to see how best to handle the car in different sit- uations, and to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the manual.

The specifications, design features and illus- trations in this owner's manual are not binding. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Volvo Car Corporation

Option

All types of option/accessory are marked with an asterisk*.

In addition to standard equipment, this manual also describes options (factory fitted equip- ment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment).

The equipment described in the owner's man- ual is not available in all cars - they have dif- ferent equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations.

In the event of uncertainty over what is stand- ard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer.

Special texts

WARNING

Warning texts advise of a risk of personal injury.

IMPORTANT

Important texts advise of a risk of material damage.

NOTE

NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of features and functions for exam- ple.

Footnote

There is footnote information in the owner's manual that is located at the bottom of the page. This information is an addition to the text that it refers to via a number. If the footnote refers to text in a table then letters are used instead of numbers for referral.

Message texts

There are displays in the car that show text messages. These text messages are high-

lighted in the owner's manual by means of the text being slightly larger and printed in grey. Examples of this are in menu texts and mes- sage texts on the information display (e.g. AUDIO SETTINGS).

Decals

The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information.

Warning for personal injury

G031590

Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the

Introduction

Important information

11

warning is ignored, may result in serious per- sonal injury or fatality.

Risk of property damage

G 03 15 92

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property.

Information

G 03 15 93

White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

Procedure lists

Procedures where action must be taken in a certain sequence are numbered in the owner's manual.

When there is a series of illustrations for step-by-step instructions each step is numbered in the same way as the corres- ponding illustration.

There are numbered lists with letters adja- cent to the series of illustrations where the order of the instructions is not significant.

Arrows appear numbered and unnum- bered and are used to illustrate a move- ment.

If there is no series of illustrations for step-by- step instructions then the different steps are numbered with normal numbers.

Position lists

Red circles containing a number are used in overview images where different com- ponents are pointed out. The number recurs in the position list featured in con- nection with the illustration that describes the item.

Bulleted lists

A bulleted list is used when there is a list of points in the owner's manual.

Example:

Introduction

Important information

12

Coolant

Engine oil

To be continued

This symbol is located furthest down to the right when a section continues on the following page.

Recording data

The driving and safety systems in the car use computers which check and share information with each other on the car's function. One or more of these computers may store informa- tion on the systems they check during normal driving, during the course of a collision or near- collision. Stored information may be used by:

Volvo Car Corporation

Service or repair workshops

Police or other authorities

Other parties who claim legal entitlement for access to the information or someone who has permission from the owner to access the information.

Accessories and extra equipment

The incorrect connection and installation of accessories can negatively affect the car's electrical system. Certain accessories only function when their associated software is installed in the car's computer system. We therefore recommend that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before installing accessories which are connected to or affect the electrical system.

Information on the Internet

At www.volvocars.com there is further infor- mation concerning your car.

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 13

Volvo Cars' environmental philosophy

G 00 00 00

Environmental care is one of Volvo Car Corpo- ration's core values which influence all opera- tions. We also believe that our customers share our consideration for the environment.

Your Volvo complies with strict international environmental standards and is also manufac- tured in one of the cleanest and most resource- efficient plants in the world. Volvo Car Corpo- ration has global ISO certification, which includes the environmental standard ISO 14001 covering all factories and several of our other units. We also set requirements for our partners so that they work systematically with environmental issues.

Fuel consumption

Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emis- sion of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide.

It is possible for the driver to influence fuel con- sumption. For more information read under the heading, Reducing environmental impact.

Efficient emission control

Your Volvo is manufactured following the con- cept "Clean inside and out" a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In

many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards.

Clean air in the passenger compartment

A passenger compartment filter prevents dust and pollen from entering the passenger com- partment via the air intake.

A sophisticated air quality system, IAQS* (Inte- rior Air Quality System) ensures that the incom- ing air is cleaner than the air in the traffic out- side.

The system consists of an electronic sensor and a carbon filter. The incoming air is moni- tored continuously and if there is an increase in

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

14

the level of certain unhealthy gases such as carbon monoxide then the air intake is closed. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example.

The entry of nitrous oxides, ground-level ozone and hydrocarbons is prevented by the carbon filter.

Textile standard

The interior of a Volvo is designed to be plea- sant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Extreme attention has been given to choosing environmentally-compatible materials. This means that they also fulfil the requirements in the Oeko-Tex 100 standard1, a major advance towards a healthier passenger compartment environment.

Oeko-Tex certification covers seatbelts, car- pets and fabrics for example. The leather in the upholstery undergoes chromium-free tanning and fulfils the certification requirements.

Volvo workshops and the environment

Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and mainte- nance of your car it becomes part of our sys-

tem. We make clear demands regarding the way in which our workshops are designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. Our workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care.

Reducing environmental impact

You can easily help reduce environmental impact, for example, by driving economically and by servicing and maintaining the car according to the instructions in the owner's manual.

The following advice will help you to do your bit for the environment: (for further advice on how you can reduce environmental impact and drive economically, see page 136).

Decrease fuel consumption by choosing ECO tyre pressure, see page 186.

A roof load and ski box increase air resis- tance, leading to higher fuel consumption. Remove them directly after use.

Remove unnecessary items from the car. The greater the load the higher the fuel consumption.

If the car is equipped with an engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold. This reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions.

Drive gently and avoid braking too hard.

Drive in the highest gear possible. Low engine speeds result in lower fuel con- sumption.

Use engine braking to slow down.

Avoid letting the engine idle. Pay attention to local regulations. Switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods.

Always dispose of environmentally hazar- dous waste, such as batteries and oils, in an environmentally safe manner. We rec- ommend that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop for advice if you are uncer- tain about the disposal of this type of waste.

Service your car regularly.

High speed increases consumption con- siderably due to increased wind resis- tance. A doubling of speed increases wind resistance 4 times.

These hints will help reduce fuel consumption without increasing travel time or lessening the enjoyment of driving. Apart from being kind to your car, you'll be saving money - and the Earth's resources.

Recycling

As a part of Volvo's environmental work, it is important that the car is recycled in an envi-

1 More information on www.oekotex.com

Introduction

Volvo and the environment

15

ronmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a dealer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility.

The owner's manual and the environment

The FSC symbol shows that the paper pulp in this publication comes from FSC certified for- ests or other controlled sources.

16 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seatbelts................................................................................................. 18 Airbag system......................................................................................... 21 Airbags.................................................................................................... 22 Activating/deactivating the airbag*......................................................... 24 Side airbags (SIPS bags)........................................................................ 26 Inflatable Curtain (IC).............................................................................. 28 WHIPS..................................................................................................... 29 When the systems deploy....................................................................... 31 Crash mode............................................................................................ 32 Child safety............................................................................................. 33

SAFETY

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

18

General information

G 02 01 04

Tensioning the hip strap. The belt must be posi- tioned low down.

Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. Ensure that all passengers use their seatbelts. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position.

Putting on a seatbelt

Pull the seatbelt out slowly and secure it by pressing the buckle into the lock. A loud "click" indicates that the seatbelt has locked.

Releasing the seatbelt

Press the red lock button and then let the seatbelt retract. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed the seatbelt in by hand so that it does not hang loose.

The seatbelt locks and cannot be with-

drawn:

if it is pulled out too quickly

during braking and acceleration

if the car leans heavily.

Keep in mind the following

do not use clips or anything else that can prevent the seatbelt from fitting properly

ensure that the seatbelt is not twisted or caught on anything

the hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen)

tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt as illustrated.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

WARNING

Each seatbelt is designed for only one per- son.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seatbelt yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or dam- age. The new seatbelt must be type- approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

19

Seatbelts and pregnancy

G 02 01 05

The seatbelt should always be worn during pregnancy. But it is crucial that it be worn in the correct way. The diagonal section of the seat- belt should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen.

The lap section of the seatbelt should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt.

As a pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers should adjust their seats and steering wheel

such that they can easily maintain control of the vehicle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). They should strive to posi- tion the seat with as large a distance as possi- ble between their abdomen and the steering wheel.

Seatbelt reminder

G 01 80 84

Unbelted occupants will be reminded to fasten their seatbelts by means of an audio and visual reminder. The audio reminder is speed dependent, and in some cases time depend- ent. The visual reminder is located in the roof console and the combined instrument panel.

Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system.

Rear seat

The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions:

Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. A message appears in the information display when the seatbelts are in use, or if one of the rear doors has been opened. The message is cleared automatically after driving for approximately 30 seconds or after press- ing the indicator stalk's READ button.

Provides a warning if one of the rear seat- belts is unfastened during a journey. This warning takes the form of a message on the information display along with the audio/visual signal. The warning ceases when the seatbelt is re-fastened or when acknowledged manually by pressing the READ button.

The message on the information display show- ing which seatbelts are in use is always avail- able. Press the READ button to see stored messages.

Certain markets

An audio signal and indicator lamp remind the driver if not wearing a seatbelt to use one. At low speed, the audio reminder will sound for the first 6 seconds.

01 Safety

Seatbelts 01

20

Seatbelt tensioner

The front seatbelts and the two for the outer rear seats are equipped with seatbelt tension- ers. A mechanism in the seatbelt tensioner tightens the seatbelt in the event of a suffi- ciently violent collision. The seatbelt then pro- vides more effective restraint for occupants.

WARNING

Never insert the tongue of the passenger's seatbelt into the buckle on the driver's side. Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not func- tion as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury.

01 Safety

Airbag system 01

21

Warning symbol on the combined instrument panel

The warning symbol in the combined instru- ment panel illuminates when the remote con- trol key is turned to key position I, II or III. The symbol goes out after approx. 6 seconds pro- vided the airbag system is fault-free.

As well as the warning symbol, a message may appear on the dis- play in appropriate cases. If the warning symbol malfunctions, the warning triangle illuminates and the message SRS AIRBAG

SERVICE REQUIRED or SRS

AIRBAG SERVICE URGENT

appears in the display. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

WARNING

If the warning symbol for the airbag system remains illuminated or illuminates while driv- ing, it means that the airbag system does not have full functionality. The symbol indi- cates a fault in the seatbelt tensioner sys- tem, SIPS, SRS or the IC system. Volvo rec- ommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop immediately.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

22

Airbag system

G 02 01 11

SRS system, left-hand drive

The system consists of airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag(s) are inflated with hot gas. To cushion the impact, the airbag deflates when compressed. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely nor- mal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, takes place within tenths of a second.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious per- sonal injury.

G 02 01 10

SRS system, right-hand drive

NOTE

The sensors react differently depending on the course of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts on the driver's side and passenger side are used.

It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a colli- sion. The airbag system senses the force of the collision on the car and adapts accord- ingly so that one or more airbags is deployed.

The capacities of the airbags are also adap- ted to the collision force to which they are subjected.

01 Safety

Airbags 01

23

G 02 01 13

Location of the passenger airbag in left-hand drive and right-hand drive cars.

WARNING

Do not put objects in front of or above the instrument panel where the passenger air- bag is located.

Airbag on the driver's side

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the driver's side. It is folded up into the centre of the steer- ing wheel. The steering wheel is marked SRS

AIRBAG.

WARNING

The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seat- belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision.

Passenger airbag

The car has an airbag to supplement the pro- tection afforded by the seatbelt on the passen- ger side. It is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked SRS AIRBAG.

WARNING

To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and back against the backrest. Seatbelts must be secured.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated.1

Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Children under 140 cm must never sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

24 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Key switch off - PACOS*

General information

The airbag for the front passenger seat can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, PACOS (Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch). For information on how to activate/deactivate, see under the heading Activating/deactivating.

Key switch off/switch

The switch for the passenger airbag (PACOS) is located on the passenger end of the instru- ment panel and is accessible when the pas- senger door is open, (see under the heading, Activating/deactivating).

Check that the switch is in the required posi- tion. Volvo recommends that the key blade is used to change position.

For information on the key blade, see page 117.

WARNING

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

If the car is equipped with a front passenger airbag, but does not have a switch (PACOS), then the airbag will always be activated.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated and the symbol in the roof console is illuminated. Failure to follow this advice could endanger the life of the child.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to sit in the front pas- senger seat if the text message in the roof panel indicates that the airbag is deacti- vated, and if the warning symbol for the air- bag system is also displayed on the com- bined instrument panel. This indicates that there has been a severe malfunction. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop as soon as possible

Activating/deactivating

Switch location

The airbag is activated. With the switch in this position, children taller than 140 cm can sit in the front passenger seat, but never children in a child seat or on a booster cushion.

The airbag is deactivated. With the switch in this position, children in a child seat or on a booster cushion can sit in the front passenger seat, but never persons taller than 140 cm.

01 Safety

Activating/deactivating the airbag* 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 25

WARNING

Activated airbag (passenger seat):

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. This applies to everyone shorter than 140 cm.

Deactivated airbag (passenger seat):

No one taller than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Messages

2

G 01 80 82

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is deactivated.

A text message and a symbol in the roof panel indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated (see preceding illustration).

G 01 80 83

Indicator showing that the passenger airbag is activated.

A warning symbol in the roof panel indicates that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated (see preceding illustration).

NOTE

When the remote control key is turned to key position II or III the warning symbol for the airbag is displayed on the combined instrument panel for approx. 6 seconds, see page 21.

Following which, the indicator in the roof console is illuminated showing the correct status for the front passenger seat airbag. For more information about the different key positions, see page 146.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

26

Side airbag

G 02 01 18

Side airbag locations.

In a side impact collision a large proportion of the collision force is transferred by the SIPS (Side Impact Protection System) to beams, pil- lars, the floor, the roof and other structural parts of the body. The side airbags at the driv- er's and front passenger seats protect the chest area and are an important part of the SIPS. The side airbags are located in the front seat backrests.

WARNING

Volvo recommends that repairs are only carried out by an authorised Volvo workshop. Defective work in the SIPS- bag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury.

Do not place any objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag.

Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags.

Side airbags are a supplement the seat- belts. Always use a seatbelt.

Child seats and side airbags

The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag.

A child seat or booster cushion can be placed on the front passenger seat provided that the car does not have an activated1 passenger air- bag.

Location

G 02 53 15

Driver's seat, left-hand drive.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag (SRS), see page 24.

01 Safety

Side airbags (SIPS bags) 01

27

G 02 53 16

Front passenger seat, left-hand drive.

The SIPS bag system consists of side airbags and sensors. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision.

01 Safety

Inflatable Curtain (IC) 01

28

Properties

G 01 52 65

The inflatable curtain IC (Inflatable Curtain) is a part of SIPS and the airbags. It is fitted in the headlining along both sides of the roof and protects the car's occupants sitting in the outer seats. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. The inflatable curtain helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision.

WARNING

Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hook is only designed for light clothing (not for solid objects such as umbrellas for example).

Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended pro- tection. Volvo recommends that you only ever use Volvo genuine parts that are approved for placement in these areas.

WARNING

Do not load the car higher than 50 mm under

the top edge of the side windows. Other- wise, the intended protection of the inflat- able curtain, which is concealed in the head- lining, may be compromised.

WARNING

The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts.

Always use a seatbelt.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

29

Protection against whiplash injury WHIPS

G 02 03 47

The whiplash protection system (WHIPS) con- sists of energy absorbing backrests and spe- cially designed head restraints for the front seats. The system is actuated by a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the col- lision, and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence.

WARNING

The WHIPS system is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt.

Properties of the seat

When the WHIPS system is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward to alter the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. This reduces the risk of whiplash injury.

WARNING

Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS system yourself. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop.

WHIPS system and child seats/booster

cushions

The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the WHIPS system.

Correct seating position

For the best possible protection, the driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint.

01 Safety

WHIPS 01

30

Do not obstruct the WHIPS system

G 02 01 25

Do not leave any objects on the floor behind the driver's seat/passenger seat that may prevent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat back- rest. Make sure you do not to obstruct the function of the WHIPS system.

G 02 01 26

Do not place objects in the rear seat that may pre- vent the WHIPS system from functioning.

WARNING

If a rear seat backrest is folded down, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not touch the folded backrest.

WARNING

If a seat has been subjected to extreme forces, such as due to a rear-end collision, the WHIPS system must be checked. Volvo recommends that it is checked by an authorised Volvo workshop.

Part of the WHIPS system's protective capacity may have been lost even if the seats appear to be undamaged.

Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop to have the sys- tem checked even after a minor rear-end collision.

01 Safety

When the systems deploy 01

31

Activating the systems

System Triggered

Seatbelt tensioner, front seat In a frontal collision and/or side-impact accident and/or rear-end collision

Seatbelt tensioner, outside rear seat In a frontal collision

Airbags In a frontal collisionA

Side airbags (SIPS) In a side-impact accidentA

Inflatable Curtain IC In a side-impact accidentA

Whiplash protection WHIPS In a rear-end collision

A The bodywork of the car could be greatly deformed in a collision without airbag deployment. A number of factors such as the rigidity and weight of the object hit, the speed of the car, the angle of the collision etc. affects how the different safety systems of the car are activated.

If the airbags have been deployed, the follow- ing is recommended:

Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags.

Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems.

Always contact a doctor.

NOTE

The airbag, SIPS, IC and belt tensioner sys- tems are deployed only once during a colli- sion

WARNING

The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liq- uid, disconnect the battery cables. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo rec- ommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/ injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns.

01 Safety

Crash mode 01

32

Driving after a collision

G 02 90 42

If the car is involved in a collision, the text CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL may appear on the information display. This means that the car has reduced functionality. Crash mode is a protective state that is enforced when the col- lision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for one of the safety systems, or the brake system.

Attempting to start the car

First, check that no fuel is leaking from the car. There must be no smell of fuel either.

If everything seems normal and you have checked for indications of fuel leakage, you may attempt to start the car.

Firstly, remove the remote control key and then reinsert it. The car's electronics will then try to reset themselves to normal mode. Then try to start the car. If CRASH MODE SEE

MANUAL is still shown on the display then the car must not be driven or towed. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once mov- ing.

Moving the car

If NORMAL MODE is shown after CRASH

MODE SEE MANUAL has been reset, the car can be moved carefully out of a dangerous position. Do not move the car further than nec- essary.

WARNING

Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in crash mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that you always engage an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to NORMAL MODE after CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL has been displayed.

WARNING

Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the CRASH MODE SEE MANUAL message is displayed. Leave the car at once.

WARNING

If the car is in crash mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its loca- tion. Volvo recommends that you have it conveyed to an authorised Volvo workshop.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

33

Children should sit comfortably and safely

Volvo recommends that children travel in rear- facing child seats until as late an age as pos- sible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then front-facing booster cushions/child seats up to 10 years of age.

The position of a child in the car and the choice of equipment are dictated by the child's weight and size, for more information, see page 35.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to coun- try. Check what does apply.

Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger.

Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats, booster cushions & attachment devices) which is designed for your particular car. Using Vol- vo's child safety equipment provides you with optimum conditions for your child to travel safely in the car. Furthermore, the child safety equipment fits and is easy to use.

NOTE

In the event of questions when fitting child safety products, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions.

Child seats

G 02 01 28

Child seats and airbags are not compatible.

NOTE

When using child safety products it is important to read the installation instruc- tions included with the product.

Do not attach the straps for the child seat to the horizontal adjustment bar, springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges can dam- age the straps.

Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting.

Location of child seats

You may place:

a child seat/booster cushion on the front passenger seat, provided the passenger airbag is not activated1.

one or more child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat.

Always fit child seats/booster cushions in the rear seat if the passenger airbag is activated. A child in the front passenger seat could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys.

1 For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

34

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated2.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

WARNING

Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally.

Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen.

Label Airbag

Label fitted on the end face of the instrument panel on the passenger side, see the illustration on page 24.

2 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 24.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

35

Recommended child seats3

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 0

max. 10 kg

Group 0+

max. 13 kg

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system.

Type approval: E1 04301146

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 04301146

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt

Type approval: E1 04301146

Volvo infant seat (Volvo Infant Seat) - rear-facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E1 03301146

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Child seats which are universally approved.

Child seats which are universally approved.

Child seats which are universally approved.

3 With regard to other child seats the car should be included in the manufacturer's enclosed list of vehicles or be universally approved in accordance with the ECE R44 legal requirement.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

36

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 1

9 18 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps.

Type approval: E5 04192

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps. Use a protective cushion between the child seat and the dashboard.

Type approval: E5 03135

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Rear-facing child seat (Child Seat) - rear- facing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt, straps and support legs.

Type approval: E5 03135

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Britax Fixway rear-facing child seat, secured with the ISOFIX fixture system and straps.

Type approval: E5 03171

Child seats which are universally approved.

Child seats which are universally approved.

Child seats which are universally approved.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

37

Weight Front seatA Outer rear seat Centre rear seat

Group 2

15-25 kg

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - rear-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt and straps

Type approval: E5 04192

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Volvo rear-facing/turnable child seat (Volvo Convertible Child Seat) - front-fac- ing child seat, secured with the car's seatbelt.

Type approval: E5 04191

Group 2/3

15 36 kg

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

Volvo booster seat with backrest (Volvo Booster Seat with backrest).

Type approval: E1 04301169

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

Booster cushion with and without back- rest (Booster Cushion with and without backrest).

Type approval: E5 03139

Integrated booster cushion (Integrated Booster Cushion) - available as a factory fitted option.

Type approval: E5 03168

A For information on activated/deactivated airbag, see page 24.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

38 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Never place a child in a child seat or on a booster cushion in the front seat if the airbag is activated4.

No one shorter than 140 cm should ever sit in the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated.

Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life.

Integrated booster cushions* G 01 50 13

Volvos integrated booster cushion for the outer rear seats is specially designed to pro-

vide optimum safety for children. Combined with the regular seatbelts the integrated booster cushion is approved for children weighing between 15 and 36 kg.

Raising the booster cushion

G 02 08 08

Pull that handle to raise the booster cush- ion.

Grasp the cushion with both hands and push it backwards.

Push until it locks in place.

WARNING

The booster cushion must be in the locked position before the child is placed there.

Check that:

the booster cushion in locked in position

the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted, and that the seatbelt is positioned correctly across the shoulder

the hip strap is low across the hips for opti- mum protection

the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder

Carefully adjust the position of the head restraint to suit the child.

4 For information on activating/deactivating the airbag (SRS), see page 24.

01 Safety

Child safety 01

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 39

WARNING

Repair or replacement should only be per- formed by a workshop. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo work- shop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the booster cushion yourself.

If an integrated booster cushion has been subjected to a major load, such as in con- junction with a collision, the entire booster cushion must be replaced. Even if the booster cushion appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protec- tion. The booster cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn.

Lowering the booster cushion

G 01 45 07

Pull the handle.

Lower the seat and press until it locks.

NOTE

Remember to stow away the booster cush- ion before lowering the rear seat backrest.

Child safety locks, rear doors

The controls for operating the rear door power windows and the rear door opening handles can be blocked from opening from the inside. For more information see page 129.

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats*

G 01 52 68

Mounting points for the ISOFIX fixture system are concealed behind the lower section of the rear seat backrest, in the outer seats.

The location of the mounting points is indicated by symbols in the backrest upholstery (see illustration above).

01 Safety

Child safety 01

40

Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points.

NOTE

The ISOFIX fixture system is an accessory for the passenger seat.

Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the ISOFIX mounting points.

01 Safety

01

41

42 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview, left-hand drive cars................................................................ 44 Overview, right-hand drive cars.............................................................. 46 Driver's door control panel..................................................................... 48 Combined instrument panel.................................................................... 49 Indicator and warning symbols............................................................... 50 Information display.................................................................................. 54 Electrical socket...................................................................................... 56 Lighting panel.......................................................................................... 57 Left-hand stalk switch............................................................................. 60 Right-hand stalk switch ......................................................................... 63 Cruise control*........................................................................................ 65 Keypad in the steering wheel* ............................................................... 67 Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers............................. 68 Parking brake.......................................................................................... 69 Power windows....................................................................................... 70 Windows, rearview and door mirrors...................................................... 72 Power sunroof* ...................................................................................... 76 Personal preferences.............................................................................. 78

HomeLink *............................................................................................ 81

INSTRUMENTS AND CONTROLS

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

44

G 01

94 88

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, left-hand drive cars

02

45

Steering wheel adjustment

Bonnet release

Control panel

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- puter

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Door handle, lock button.

Air vents in dashboard

Air vent for side window

Cruise control

Horn, airbag

Combined instrument panel

Keypad for infotainment system

Windscreen wipers and washer, headlamp washers

Ignition switch

Sunroof controls

No function

No function

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator

Interior rearview mirror

Display for climate control and infotain- ment system

Infotainment system

Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal preferences

Climate control

Gear lever

Hazard warning flashers

Door handle

Glovebox

Parking brake

Electrical socket/cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

46

G 02

82 04

02 Instruments and controls

Overview, right-hand drive cars

02

47

Electrical socket, cigarette lighter

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS

Switch, optional equipment

Parking brake

Control panel

Glovebox

Door handle

Air vent for side window

Air vents in dashboard

Gear lever

Climate control

Controls for climate control, infotainment system and personal preferences

Infotainment system

Display for climate control and infotain- ment system

Interior rearview mirror

Seatbelt reminder and passenger seat air- bag indicator

Switch for interior lighting

Reading lamp, left-hand side

Reading lamp, right-hand side

No function

No function

Sunroof controls

Ignition switch

Windscreen wipers and washers, head- lamp washers

Cruise control

Combined instrument panel

Horn, airbag

Keypad for infotainment system

Hazard warning flashers

Door handle, lock button

Lighting, fuel filler flap opener

Direction indicators, main beam, trip com- puter

Bonnet release

Steering wheel adjustment

02 Instruments and controls

Driver's door control panel

02

48 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Driver's door control panel

Disengaging the rear power windows. Electric child safety lock*

Power windows

Door mirror, left-hand side

Door mirrors, setting

Door mirror, right-hand side

02 Instruments and controls

Combined instrument panel

02

49

G 02

90 46

Speedometer.

Direction indicators, left.

Warning symbol.

Information display Shows information or warning messages, outside temperature and clock. When the outside temperature is between +2 C to -5 C a snowflake illu- minates on the display. This warns of icy roads. The outside temperature gauge may show a slightly high reading after the car has been stationary.

Information symbol.

Direction indicator, right.

Tachometer Indicates engine speed in thousands of revolutions per minute (rpm).

Indicator and warning symbols.

Fuel gauge, see also trip computer, pag e 61.

Main beam indicator.

Display Display for automatic gear posi- tion, rain sensor, odometer, trip meter and cruise control.

Also shows gear shift indicator (GSI) and gear positions in the 1.6D DRIVe model, see page 151.

Button for trip meter Used to measure short distances. Short presses on the but- ton switches between the two trip meters T1 and T2. A long press (more than 2 sec- onds) resets an active trip meter to zero.

Temperature gauge - Used for the engine cooling system. A message will appear on the display if the temperature becomes too high and the gauge goes into the red zone. Bear in mind that extra lights placed in front of the air intake, for example, reduce the cooling capacity at high outside tempera- tures and high engine loads.

Indicator and warning symbols.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

50

Functionality check, symbols

All indicator and warning symbols1 illuminate when the remote control key is turned to posi- tion II before starting. This is to check that the symbols are working. When the engine starts, all the symbols should go out except the hand- brake symbol, which only goes out when the brake is disengaged.

If the engine does not start within five seconds, all symbols extin- guish except the symbols for a fault in the car's emissions system and for low oil pressure. Certain symbols may have no function, depending on the car's specifica- tions.

Symbols in the centre of the instrument panel

G 03 07 55

The red warning symbol illumi- nates when a fault has been indi- cated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the

information display at the same time. The sym- bol remains visible until the fault has been rec- tified but the text message can be cleared with the READ button, see page 54. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols.

When the symbol illuminates:

1. Stop in a safe manner. Do not drive the car further.

2. Read the information on the information display. Implement the action in accord- ance with the message in the display. Clear the message using READ.

The yellow information symbol illu- minates and a text appears on the information display. The message text is cleared using the READ but- ton, see page 54, or disappears

automatically after a period of time (time depending on which function is indicated).

The yellow information symbol can also illumi- nate in conjunction with other symbols.

NOTE

When a service message is shown, the sym- bol and message are cleared using the READ button, or disappear automatically after a time.

1 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 51

Indicator symbols left-hand side

G 02 90 48

Fault in car's emissions system

ABS fault

Rear fog lamp

Stability system STC or DSTC

No function

Engine preheater (diesel)

Low level in fuel tank

Emissions system

If the symbol illuminates then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Volvo recom- mends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo work-

shop for inspection.

ABS fault

If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS func- tion.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. Drive to a workshop to have the ABS sys- tem checked if the symbol remains lit. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

Rear fog lamp

This symbol is lit when the rear fog lamp is on.

Stability system STC or DSTC*

For information on the system's functions and symbols, see page 159.

Engine preheater (diesel)

This symbol illuminates during engine preheating. Preheating occurs when the temperature is below -2 C. The car can be started once the symbol goes out.

Low level in fuel tank

When the symbol illuminates the level in the fuel tank is low, refuel as soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

52

Indicator symbols right-hand side

G 02 90 49

Indicator symbol for trailer

Parking brake applied

Airbags SRS

Low oil pressure

Seatbelt reminder

Alternator not charging

Fault in brake system

Indicator symbol for trailer

This symbol flashes when the direction indicators are used and the trailer is connected. If the sym- bol does not flash then one of the lamps on the trailer or the car is

faulty.

Parking brake applied

The symbol illuminates when the parking brake is applied. Always pull the parking brake lever to the end position.

NOTE

The symbol illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

Airbags SRS

If this symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, it means a fault has been detected in the seatbelt buckle, SRS, SIPS or IC system. Volvo recommends that

drive directly to an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection.

Low oil pressure2

If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pres- sure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the

symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Seatbelt reminder

This symbol illuminates if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt.

Alternator not charging

If this symbol illuminates while driving, a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Volvo recom- mends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

Fault in brake system

If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low.

2 For certain engine variants, the symbol for low oil pressure is not used. Warnings are given via display text, see page 54.

02 Instruments and controls

Indicator and warning symbols

02

53

Stop the car in a safe place and check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 216. If the reservoir level is below MIN then the car should not be driven fur- ther. Volvo recommends that the car is transported to an authorised Volvo work- shop to have the brake system checked.

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols illuminate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake force distribution system.

1. Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine.

2. Restart the engine.

3. If both symbols extinguish, continue driv- ing.

4. If the symbols remain illuminated, check the level in the brake fluid reservoir, see page 216.

5. If the brake fluid level is normal but the symbols are still illuminated, the car can be driven, with great care, to a workshop to

have the brake system checked. Volvo rec- ommends that you seek assistance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

6. If the level in the reservoir is below MIN

then the car should not be driven any fur- ther. Have the car transported to a work- shop to have the brake system checked. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS symbols are lit at the same time, there is a risk that the rear end will skid during heavy braking.

Reminder doors not closed

If one of the doors, the bonnet3 or the boot lid is not properly closed, the driver will be reminded of this.

Low speed

If the car moves at a speed less than 5 km/h, the information sym- bol illuminates and DRIVER

DOOR OPEN, PASSENGER

DOOR OPEN,LEFT REAR

DOOR OPEN, BONNET OPEN or RIGHT

REAR DOOR OPEN is shown on the display. Stop the car safely as soon as possible and close the door or bonnet.

High speed

If the car is moving faster than 10 km/h, the symbol illuminates and one of the texts indicated in the preceding paragraph appears on the display.

Boot lid reminder

If the boot lid is open, this informa- tion symbol will illuminate and BOOT LID OPEN will appear on the display.

3 Only cars with alarm.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

54

Messages

G 02 90 50

When a warning or indicator symbol illuminates the information display shows a supplemen- tary message.

Press the READ button (1).

Switch between messages with the READ but- ton. Fault messages are stored in the memory until the fault is rectified.

NOTE

If a warning message appears while you are using the trip computer, the message must be read (press READ) before the previous activity can be resumed.

Message Specification

STOP SAFELYA Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.

SERVICE

URGENTA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car immediately.

SEE MANUALA Read the Owner's Manual.

SERVICE

REQUIREDA Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.

HIGH ENGINE

TEMP STOP

ENGINE

Stop the car in a safe manner and turn off the engine. Serious risk of damage.

BOOK TIME FOR

SERVICE

Time to book regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service.

Message Specification

TIME FOR REGU-

LAR SERVICE

Time for regular service. Volvo rec- ommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out the service. The timing is determined by the number of kil- ometres driven, number of months since the last serv- ice, engine running time and oil grade.

SERVICE OVER-

DUE

If the service inter- vals are not followed then the warranty does not cover any damaged parts. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop car- ries out the service.

TRANSMISSION

OIL CHANGE NEE-

DED

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop checks the car as soon as possible.

02 Instruments and controls

Information display

02

55

Message Specification

REMINDER

CHECK OIL LEVEL

Check the oil level. The message is shown every 10 000 km (certain engine variants). For information on checking the oil level, see page 213.

SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER

MANUAL

Diesel particle filter requires regenera- tion, see page 140.

STC SPIN CON-

TROL OFF/DSTC

SPIN CONTROL

OFF

The function of the stability and traction control system is reduced, see page 160 for more variants.

Message Specification

TRANSMISSION

PERFORMANCE

LOW

The gearbox cannot handle full capacity. Drive carefully until the message clears, see page 155.

If shown repeatedly then Volvo recom- mends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contac- ted.

Message Specification

TRANSMISSION

OIL TEMP HIGH

Drive more smoothly or stop the car in a safe manner. Disen- gage the gear and run the engine at idling speed until the message clears. For more information, see page 155.

TRANSM OIL

TEMP STOP

SAFELY

Critical fault. Stop the car immediately in a safe manner. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted.B

A Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen.

B For more messages concerning automatic transmission, see page 155.

02 Instruments and controls

Electrical socket

02

56 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

12 V electrical socket

G 01 96 21

The electrical socket can be used for 12 V accessories, such as mobile phone chargers and coolers. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least posi- tion I.

IMPORTANT

Max. socket is 10 A (120 W) if one socket is used at a time. If both sockets are used simultaneously, 7.5 A (90 W) per socket is applicable.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

Cigarette lighter*

Activate the lighter by pushing in the button. The button pops out when the lighter is hot. Pull out the lighter and light a cigarette on the heated coils.

Electrical socket in the rear seat

G 02 90 82

The electrical socket can be used for various accessories, such as mobile phone chargers and coolers.

NOTE

Cigarette lighter does not work in this socket.

It is designed for 12 V. For the socket to supply current, the remote control key must be in at least position I.

WARNING

Always leave the plug in the socket when the socket is not in use.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 57

General

G 02 01 39

Thumbwheel for headlamp levelling

Light switches

Thumbwheel for adjusting display and instrument lighting

Front fog lamps*

Opening the fuel filler flap

Rear fog lamp

Posi- tion

Specification

Automatic/deactivated dipped beam. Only main beam flash.

Position/parking lamps

Automatic dipped beam. Main beam and main beam flash work in this position.

Headlamp levelling

The load in the car changes the vertical align- ment of the headlamp beam, which could daz- zle oncoming motorists. Avoid this by adjusting the height of the beam.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Turn the headlamp control (2) to one of the end positions.

3. Roll the control (1) up or down respectively to raise or lower beam alignment.

Cars with active Xenon headlamps - ABL* have automatic headlamp levelling, so there is no control (1).

Position/parking lamps

Position/parking lamps can be switched on irrespective of remote control key position.

Turn the headlamp control (2) to the centre position.

When the remote control key is in position II the position/parking lamps and number plate light- ing are always on.

Headlamps

Automatic dipped beam*

Dipped beam comes on automatically when the remote control key is turned to position II, except when the headlamp control (2) is in the centre position. If necessary, the automatic dipped beam can be deactivated. Volvo rec- ommends that this is performed by an author- ised Volvo workshop.

Automatic dipped beam, main beam

1. Turn the remote control key to position II.

2. Dipped beam is activated by means of turning the headlamp control (2) clockwise to the end position.

3. Main beam is activated by means of mov- ing the left-hand stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position and releasing it, see page 60.

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

58 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The lamps are switched off automatically when the remote control key is turned to position I or 0.

Instrument lighting

The instrument lighting is switched on when the remote control key is in position II and the headlamp control (2) is in one of the end posi- tions. The lighting is automatically dimmed during the day and can be controlled manually at night.

Roll the control up or down (3) for brighter or dimmer lighting.

Enhanced display lighting

To facilitate reading the odometer, trip meter, clock and outside temperature gauge, these illuminate when the car is unlocked and when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The displays extinguish when the car is locked.

Fog lamps

NOTE

Regulations for use of fog lamps vary from country to country.

Front fog lamps*

The front fog lamps can be switched on along with the headlamps or the position lamps/park- ing lamps.

Press the button (4).

The light in the button (4) illuminates when the front fog lamps are switched on.

Rear fog lamp

The rear fog lamp can only be switched on with the headlamps or the front fog lamps.

Press the button (6).

The rear fog lamp indicator symbol on the com- bined instrument panel and the light in the but- ton (6) illuminate when the rear fog lamp is switched on.

Fuel filler flap

Press button (5) to open the fuel filler flap when the car is unlocked, see page 126.

Active Xenon headlamps*

G 02 65 07

Lighting panel, for active Xenon headlamps

If the car is equipped with active Xenon head- lamps (Active Bending Lights, ABL) the light from the headlamps follows the steering wheel movement in order to provide maximum light- ing in bends and junctions and so provide increased safety.

The LED illuminates when the function is activated. The LED flashes and an error mes- sage is shown on the information display in the

02 Instruments and controls

Lighting panel

02

59

event of a malfunction. The function is only active in twilight or darkness and only when the car is moving.

The function can be deactivated/activated with the headlamp control.

G 02 07 89

Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively.

Brake light

The brake light automatically comes on during braking. For information on the Emergency brake lights and automatic hazard warning flashers, see page 158.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

60

Stalk switch positions

3 4

1

2

1

2

G 02 63 80

Short flash sequence, direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence, direction indi- cators

Main beam flash and switching from main to dipped beam

Home safe lighting and switching from dipped to main beam

Direction indicators

Continuous flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to end position (2).

The stalk switch remains in its end position and is moved back manually, or automatically by steering wheel movement.

Short flash sequence

Move the stalk switch up or down to position (1) and release.

The direction indicators flash three times and the stalk switch returns to its home position.

Main beam flash

Move the stalk switch gently towards the steering wheel to position (3).

Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. Main beam flash only works when the remote control key is inserted in the ignition switch.

Switching, main and dipped beam

The remote control key must be in position II and the headlamp control in end position, see page 57, for main beam to be switched on.

Activating main beam:

Move the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position (4) and release.

Deactivating main beam:

Move the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to position (3) and release.

Home safe lighting

Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. The standard delay is 301 seconds, but can be changed to 60 or 90 seconds, see page 79.

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch.

2. Move the stalk switch towards the steering wheel to the end position (4) and release.

3. Get out of the car and lock the door.

1 Factory settings.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 61

Trip computer*

G 02 90 52

READ - confirms

Thumbwheel2 - browse between menus and options in the trip computer list

RESET2 - resets

Controls

To scroll through trip computer information turn the thumbwheel either up or down in steps. Continue turning to return to the starting point.

NOTE

If a warning message interrupts while you are using the trip computer, this message must be acknowledged. Acknowledge by pressing the READ button and revert to the trip computer function.

Functions

The trip computer displays the following infor- mation:

--- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED

--.- KM/L INSTANTANEOUS

--.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

STC ON /DSTC ON *, see page 159

--- MPH ACTUAL SPEED 3

AVERAGE SPEED

When the ignition is switched off, the average speed is stored and used as the basis of the new value when you continue driving. Reset using the RESET button.

INSTANTANEOUS

Current fuel consumption is calculated every second. The information on the display is updated every couple of seconds. When the

car is stationary, "--.-" appears on the display. During the period for regeneration4 fuel con- sumption may increase, see page 140.

AVERAGE

The average fuel consumption is stored when the ignition is switched off and remains until the function is reset. Reset using the RESET but- ton.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if a fuel-driven heater is used.

KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

The range to empty is calculated based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km. No guaranteed range remains when the display shows "--- KILOMETRES TO EMPTY TANK

". Refuel as soon as possible.

NOTE

There may be a slight error in the reading if fuel consumption is changed due to a change in driving style or if a fuel-driven heater is used for example.

2 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system. 3 Certain markets. 4 Only applies to diesel cars with particle filter.

02 Instruments and controls

Left-hand stalk switch

02

62

MPH ACTUAL SPEED.3

Current speed is displayed in mph.

Resetting

1. Select --- KM/H AVERAGE SPEED or --.- L/100 KM AVERAGE

2. Reset with one press on the RESET but- ton. Press and hold the RESET button for at least five seconds to reset the average speed and average consumption at the same time.

3 Certain markets.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 63

Windscreen wipers

0

0

A

CB

G 02 54 19

Windscreen and headlamp washers

Rain sensor - On/Off

Thumbwheel

Windscreen wipers off

The windscreen wipers are off when the stalk switch is in position 0.

Single sweep

Raise the stalk switch to make a single sweep.

Intermittent wiping

You can adjust and set a suitable speed for intermittent wiping. Turn the thumbwheel (C) up for a shorter interval between sweeps. Turn it down to increase the delay.

Continuous wiping

The wipers sweep at normal speed.

The wipers sweep at high speed.

IMPORTANT

Before activating the wipers during winter ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the wind- screen is scraped away.

IMPORTANT

Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The wind- screen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating.

Windscreen/headlamp washer

Move the stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. The wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch is released.

High-pressure headlamp washing*

High-pressure headlamp washing consumes a large quantity of washer fluid. To save fluid, the headlamps are washed as follows:

Dipped beam selected with the switch on light- ing panel:

The headlamps are washed the first time the windscreen is washed. Within the next ten minutes, they are washed every fifth wash cycle of the windscreen. In the event of a longer interval the headlamps are washed each time.

Parking/position lamps selected with the switch on the lighting panel:

Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

The switch on the lighting panel is in position 0:

Active Xenon headlamps are only washed every fifth wash cycle irrespective of the time that elapses.

Halogen headlamps are not washed.

02 Instruments and controls

Right-hand stalk switch

02

64 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Rain sensor*

G 02 90 53

The rain sensor automatically activates the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. The sensitivity of the rain sensor can be adjusted using the thumbwheel (C), see page 63.

Turn the thumbwheel upwards for higher sen- sitivity and downwards for lower sensitivity, (an extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upwards).

On/Off

When activating the rain sensor, the remote control key must be in position I or II and the windscreen wiper stalk switch must be in posi- tion 0 (not activated).

Activating the rain sensor:

Press the button (B), see page 63. A display symbol shows that the rain sensor is active.

To turn the rain sensor off, either:

1. Press button (B)

2. Press the stalk switch downward to another wiper program. If the stalk switch is raised, the rain sensor will remain active, the wipers make an extra sweep and then return to rain sensor mode when the stalk is released to position 0 (not activated), see page 63.

The rain sensor is automatically deactivated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch or five minutes after the igni- tion is switched off.

IMPORTANT

At an automatic car wash: Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the button (B) while the remote control key is in position I or II. Otherwise, the windscreen wipers could start swiping and become damaged.

Thumbwheel

Use the thumbwheel to adjust the frequency of wiper sweeps when intermittent wiping is

selected, or the sensitivity to rain when the rain sensor is selected.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 65

Activating

G 02 01 41

The controls for cruise control are to the left of the steering wheel.

Setting the desired speed:

1. Press the CRUISE button. CRUISE is shown on the combined instrument panel.

2. Touch + or to lock the vehicle speed. CRUISE-ON appears in the combined instrument panel.

Cruise control cannot be engaged at speeds below 30 km/h or above 200 km/h.

Increasing or decreasing speed

G 02 90 54

Increase or decrease the speed by press- ing and holding + or . The speed of the car when the button is released is set as the new speed.

A brief press (less than half a second) on + or changes the speed by 1 km/h or 1 mph1.

NOTE

A temporary increase in speed (less than one minute) using the accelerator, such as while overtaking, does not affect the cruise control setting. When you release the accel- erator, the car will return to the programmed speed.

Temporary disengagement

Press 0 to disengage the cruise control temporarily. CRUISE will be shown on the combined instrument panel. The speed set earlier is stored in the memory.

The cruise control is also temporarily disen- gaged when:

the brake pedal or clutch pedal is depressed

speed falls below 25-30 km/h1 when trav- elling uphill

the gear selector is moved to position N

wheel spin or wheel lock-up occurs

a temporary increase in speed lasts longer than one minute.

1 Depending on engine type.

02 Instruments and controls

Cruise control*

02

66 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Return to the set speed

Press this button to resume the previously set speed. CRUISE

ON appears on the combined instrument panel.

Disengaging

Press CRUISE to disengage the cruise control. CRUISE ON clears on the com- bined instrument panel.

02 Instruments and controls

Keypad in the steering wheel*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 67

Button functions

The keypad is available in two versions depending on the equipment in the car.

The four buttons at the bottom of the steering wheel keypad control the radio and the phone. The function of a button depends on which system is active. The steering wheel keypad can be used to scroll between preset stations, change CD tracks and adjust the volume.

Press and hold one of the arrow keys to fast forward/reverse or search for the next station.

The phone must be active to make settings in the phone system. Activate the phone function with the PHONE button in the centre console

in order to enable control of the phone system with the arrow keys.

To return to Audio only, press EXIT.

With the ENTER button you can select, acti- vate and deactivate options in menus. The but- ton can also be used to access the folder struc- ture and start the playback of audio files if a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player/ CD changer*. For more information, see page 247.

02 Instruments and controls

Steering wheel adjustment, hazard warning flashers

02

68

Steering wheel adjustment

G 02 01 43

The steering wheel can be adjusted for both height and reach.

1. Pull the lever towards you to release the steering wheel.

2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you best.

3. Push back the lever to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you push the lever back.

WARNING

Adjust the steering wheel before driving off, never while driving. Before driving, check that the steering wheel is fixed in position.

Hazard warning flashers

G 02 01 44

Use the hazard warning flashers (all direction indicators flash) when the car is stopped where it could be a traffic hazard or obstruction. Press the button to activate the function.

A sufficiently violent collision or heavy braking activates the hazard warning flashers automat- ically, see page 158. The function can be deactivated with the button.

NOTE

Regulations regarding the use of hazard warning flashers vary from country to coun- try.

02 Instruments and controls

Parking brake

02

69

Parking brake (handbrake)

The lever is located between the front seats.

NOTE

The warning lamp symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates irrespective of how hard the parking brake is applied.

WARNING

Make sure that children, other passengers or objects are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when the parking brake is applied or released by the driver.

How to apply the parking brake

1. Fully depress the foot brake pedal.

2. Pull the lever firmly.

3. Release the foot brake pedal and make sure that the car is at a standstill position.

4. If the vehicle moves then the parking brake lever must be pulled more firmly.

When parking a vehicle always put the gear selector in position 1 (for manual transmission) or P (for automatic transmission)

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked facing uphill; turn the wheels away from the kerb.

If the car is parked facing downhill; turn the wheels towards the kerb.

WARNING

Get into the habit of always applying the parking brake when parking on a slope - leaving the car in gear, or in P if it has auto- matic transmission, is not sufficient to hold the car in all situation.

How to release the parking brake

1. Press the foot brake pedal down firmly.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up slightly, press the button, release the parking brake lever and release the button.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

70

Operation

The power windows are operated using the controls in the doors. The ignition key must be in position I or II for the power windows to operate.

The windows continue to work for a limited amount of time when the car is stopped and after the remote control key is removed, provi- ded none of the doors is opened. Operate the windows with caution.

To open a window:

Depress the front of the control.

To close a window:

Raise the front of the control.

NOTE

One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly.

Remote control and lock buttons

To operate the power windows with lock but- tons and remote control, see pages 116 and 126.

WARNING

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows. Pay close attention if the rear door windows are controlled from the driver's door or if the windows are closed with the remote control.

Driver's door

Controls, power windows.

Rear window controls

Front window controls

The driver can operate all of the power win- dows from the driver's seat.

The windows can be opened and closed in two ways:

Manual operation

Depress one of the controls (1) or (2) gently or raise it gently. The power window opens or closes as long as the switch is actuated.

Automatic operation

Fully depress one of the controls (2) or raise it, then release. The side window will then open or close automatically. If the window is obstructed by an object, the movement will stop.

WARNING

The function that interrupts the movement of the windows in the event of them being blocked works with both automatic and manual closing, although not with pinch protection deployed.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Remember to switch off the supply to the power windows by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

Make sure that children and other passen- gers cannot be trapped in any way when closing the windows.

02 Instruments and controls

Power windows

02

71

Blocking power windows in the rear doors

Blocking rear power windows and electric child safety locks*.

The light in the switch is lit

The rear door windows can only be operated from the driver's door.

The light in the switch is extinguished

The rear door windows can be operated both with the control on each rear door and with the controls on the driver's door.

NOTE

If the car has electric child safety locks on the rear doors, the light indicates that these are also activated. The doors then cannot be opened from the inside. A text message is shown on the display when the electric child safety locks are activated.

Front passenger seat

Front passenger seat.

The control in the front passenger door oper- ates that window only.

Rear power windows

The rear door windows can be operated with the control on each door or with the switch on the driver's door. If the light in the switch for blocking the rear power windows (located in the control panel in the driver's door) is lit, the rear door windows can only be operated from the driver's door. The windows in the rear doors are operated in the same way as the windows in the front doors.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

72 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Interior rearview mirror

Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirror and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind.

Dipping

Control for dimming

Normal position

Dimmed position.

Automatic dimming*

Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the rearview mirror. The control (1) is not available in mirrors with automatic dim- ming.

Interior rearview mirror with compass*

G 03 10 43

The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction in which the front of the car is pointing. Eight different directions are shown with English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW

(south west), W (west) and NW (north west).

Calibrating the compass

G 03 10 45

The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass is set for the geographical area to which the car was delivered. The compass should be calibrated if the car is moved across several magnetic zones.

1. Stop the car in a wide open area with the engine running at idling speed.

2. Press and hold button (1) for at least 6 sec- onds. Following which, the character C is shown (the button is concealed so use a paper clip for example to press it in).

3. Press and hold button (1) for at least 3 sec- onds. The number for the current magnetic zone is displayed.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

73

4. Press the button (1) repeatedly until the number for the required magnetic zone (1

15) is shown, refer to the map of magnetic zones for the compass.

5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C.

6. Following which, press and hold the button in for 9 seconds and select L for left-hand drive cars and R for right-hand drive.

7. Drive slowly in a circle with a maximum speed of 10 km/h until a compass direction is shown on the display, which indicates that the calibration is complete.

G 02 01 50

Magnetic zones, Europe.

G 02 01 51

Magnetic zones, Asia.

G 02 01 52

Magnetic zones, South America.

G 02 01 53

Magnetic zones, Australia.

G 02 01 54

Magnetic zones, Africa.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

74 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Sun blind*

There is a sun blind built into the rear parcel shelf.

Pull up the sun blind and hook it into the roof clip using the two hooks for the blind. > The spring force in the blind keeps the

hooks in position.

When the sun blind is not in use - unhook it, hold onto the handle and allow the blind to roll up slowly.

Door mirrors

The controls for adjusting the two door mirrors are at the front of the driver's door armrest. The rearview mirrors can be operated in ignition position I and II.

1. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light on the button illumi- nates.

2. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre.

3. Press the L or R button again. The light goes out.

Retractable power door mirrors*

The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. This can be carried out in ignition position I and II.

Retracting the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully retracted position.

WARNING

Both door mirrors are the wide angled type to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear further away than they actually are.

Folding out the mirrors

1. Press the L and R button at the same time.

2. Release the buttons. The mirrors automat- ically stop in the fully extended position.

Automatic retracting/extending

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control or using the Keyless-system, see page 122, the door mirrors are automati- cally retracted/extended.

02 Instruments and controls

Windows, rearview and door mirrors

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 75

NOTE

The door mirrors will not be extended auto- matically during unlocking if they were retracted using the controls in the door.

If the car is locked with the remote control and is then started, the door mirrors will still be extended.

The function can be activated/deactivated under Car settings Mirror fold on

locking, see page 79 for a description of the menu system.

Resetting to neutral

Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset to the neutral position for electric retracting and extending to work.

1. Use the L and R buttons to retract the mir- rors.

2. Extend the mirrors again with the L and R button. The mirrors are now reset to the neutral.

Home safe and approach lighting

The light* on the door mirrors illuminates when the approach lighting or home safe lighting is activated.

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS*

BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot", see page 163.

Water and dirt-repellent coating*

The front side windows are treated with a coating which improves the view

in poor weather conditions. For information on maintenance, see page 201.

IMPORTANT

Do not use a metal ice scraper to remove ice from the windows. The water and dirt-repel- lent coating could be damaged.

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

76 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Open positions

G 00 75 03

The sunroof controls are located in the roof panel. The sunroof can be opened in two posi- tions:

Ventilation position, up at the rear edge

Sliding position, backwards/forwards

The remote control key must be in position I or II.

WARNING

If there are children in the car:

Switch off the supply to the power sunroof by removing the remote control key if the driver leaves the car.

G 02 92 22

Opening, automatic

Opening, manual

Closing, manual

Closing, automatic

Opening, ventilation position

Closing, ventilation position

Ventilation position

Open:

Press the rear edge of the control (5) upward.

Close:

Pull the rear edge of the control (6) down- ward.

From ventilation position to fully open sunroof:

Pull the control rearward to the end posi- tion (1) and release.

Sliding position

Automatic operation

Pull the control past the point of resistance (2) to the rear end position (1) or past the point of resistance (3) to the forward end position (4) and release. The sunroof opens/closes completely.

Manual operation

Open:

Pull the control rearward to the point of resistance (2). The sunroof moves to maxi- mum open position as long as the button is kept depressed.

Close:

Press the control forward to the point of resistance (3). The sunroof moves to

02 Instruments and controls

Power sunroof*

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 77

closed position as long as the button is kept depressed.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch-protection function only operates during automatic closing, not manual closing.

Closing with remote control or lock button

G 02 01 57

One long press on the lock button closes the sunroof and all the windows. The doors and the boot lid are locked.

If you need to interrupt closing:

Press the lock button again.

WARNING

Make sure that children or other passengers are not in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the sunroof with the remote control. Always operate the sunroof with caution.

Sunscreen

The sunroof features a manual, sliding interior sunscreen. The sunscreen slides back auto- matically when the sunroof is opened. Grip the handle and slide the screen forward to close it.

Pinch protection

The sunroof's pinch protection function is acti- vated if the hatch is blocked by an object. If blocked, the sunroof will stop and automati- cally open to the previous position.

WARNING

The sunroof's pinch protection function only operates during automatic closing, not dur- ing manual closing.

Make sure that nobody is in danger of becoming trapped in any way when closing the sunroof.

Wind deflector

The sunroof has a wind deflector that is folded up when the sunroof is in the open position.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

78

Possible settings

Personal preferences can be set for some of the car's functions. This applies to locks, cli- mate control and audio functions. For audio functions, see page 238.

Control panel

A

D

B

C

E

G 02

63 07

Control panel.

Display

MENU

EXIT

ENTER

Navigation

Use

The settings are shown on the display (A).

Open the menu to enter settings:

1. Press MENU (B).

2. Scroll, for example, to Car settings with the navigation button (E).

3. Press ENTER (D).

4. Select an alternative with the navigation button (E).

5. Press ENTER to activate the selection.

Activated function is shown in the display with . Deactivated function is shown in the display with .

Close the menu:

Press EXIT (C) for approximately one sec- ond.

Clock, adjustment

The hour and minute are each adjusted sepa- rately.

1. Use the numbers on the keypad or "arrow up" or "arrow down" on the navigation but- ton (E).

2. Select the number for adjustment using "arrow right" or "arrow left" on the naviga- tion button.

3. Press ENTER to start the clock.

NOTE

If the car has a 12-hour clock then AM/PM is selected using "arrow up" or "arrow down" after the final minute number has been adjusted.

Climate settings

Automatic blower adjust

The fan speed can be set to AUTO mode in cars equipped with ECC:

Select from Low, Normal and High.

Recirculation timer

When the timer is active, the air recirculates for 3-12 minutes, depending on the outside air temperature.

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 79

Select On/Off depending on whether or not you wish the recirculation timer to be active.

Reset all

Resets the climate function options to the fac- tory settings.

Car settings

Retract mirrors when locking*

When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control the door mirrors can be retrac- ted/extended automatically. The On/Off option is available.

Reduced guard*

The deadlocks function can be temporarily deactivated and the alarm level reduced if someone wishes to remain in the car and the doors have to be locked from the outside. The Activate once and Ask on exit options are available, see pages 127 and 131.

Unlock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is unlocked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.

Lock confirm. light

The hazard warning flashers can provide feed- back when the car is locked with the remote control. The On/Off option is available.

Doors auto lock

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and boot lid can be locked automatically. The On/Off option is available. Pulling the door handle twice unlocks and opens the doors from the inside.

Doors unlock

There are two alternatives for unlocking:

All doors one press of the remote control unlocks all doors and the boot lid.

Driver door, then all one press of the remote control unlocks the driver's door. A second press then unlocks the passenger door and the boot lid.

Keyless entry*

All doors - all doors are unlocked simul- taneously.

Doors on same side front and rear doors on the same side are unlocked simultaneously.

Both front doors both front doors are unlocked simultaneously.

Either front door any door or the boot lid can be unlocked separately.

Simultaneous closing/opening of all

windows

This function can be selected for the lock but- ton on the remote control and the front doors'

central locking button, as well as the outside door handle button on cars with the keyless system:

Auto. close all windows - all windows and the sunroof are closed simultaneously with one long press on the lock button.

This function can be selected for the unlock button on the remote control and the front doors' central locking button:

Auto. open all windows all windows are opened simultaneously with one long press on the unlock button.

Approach lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remain on when the approach lighting button is pressed. The following alternatives are availa- ble:

30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Home safe lighting

Select the time the car's lights should remain on when the left-hand stalk switch is pulled back after the remote control key has been removed. The following alternatives are avail- able:

02 Instruments and controls

Personal preferences

02

80

30 seconds

60 seconds

90 seconds

Information

VIN number - (Vehicle Identification Number) is the car's unique identity num- ber.

Number of keys - The number of keys registered for the car is shown.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 81

General

G 03 00 70

HomeLink is a programmable remote control which can control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door, alarm system, outdoor light- ing and indoor lighting etc.) and in doing so replace their remote controls. HomeLink is supplied built into the left-hand sun visor.

The HomeLink panel consists of three pro- grammable buttons and one indicator lamp.

NOTE

HomeLink is designed to be inoperable if the car is locked from the outside.

Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. for purchasing a new car).

Erase the programming for the buttons when selling the car.

Metallic sun visors should not be used in cars equipped with HomeLink. This could have a negative effect on the HomeLink function.

Operation

When HomeLink is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls.

Depress the programmed button to activate the garage door, alarm system etc. The indi- cator lamp illuminates for the time that the but- ton is kept depressed.

NOTE

In the event that the ignition is not activated, HomeLink operates for 30 minutes after the driver's door has been opened.

The original remote controls can of course be used in parallel with HomeLink .

WARNING

If HomeLink is used to operate a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while it is in motion.

Do not use the HomeLink remote control for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. The garage door must react immediately when it detects that something is preventing its movement, and stop directly and reverse. A garage door without these characteristics could cause personal injury. For further information - contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

Programming for the first time

The first step erases the memory in HomeLink and must not be carried out when only one individual button is being reprogram- med.

1. Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. The flash- ing indicates that HomeLink is set in "learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

82 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

2. Position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button for the original remote control and the button to be programmed on HomeLink simultaneously. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has changed over from slow to rapid flash- ing. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button1" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.

Programming individual buttons

To reprogram an individual button, proceed in accordance with the following:

1. Depress the required button on HomeLink and do not release until step 3 has been completed.

2. When the indicator lamp on HomeLink starts to flash, after approx. 20 seconds, position the original remote control 5-30 cm from HomeLink . Monitor the indi- cator lamp.

The particular distance that is required between the original remote control and HomeLink depends on the programming of the device in question. Perhaps several attempts will be required at different dis- tances. Maintain each position for approx. 15 seconds before trying a new one.

3. Depress the button on the original remote control. The indicator lamp will start to flash. When the flashing has changed over from a slow to a rapid flashing - release both buttons. The rapid flashing indicates successful programming.

4. Test the programming by depressing the programmed button on HomeLink and watching the indicator lamp:

1 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

02 Instruments and controls

HomeLink *

02

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 83

Constant glow: The indicator lamp illu- minates with a constant glow when the button is kept depressed, this indicates that the programming is complete. The garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed HomeLink button is depressed.

Glow not constant: The indicator lamp flashes quickly for approx. 2 seconds and then changes over to a constant glow for approx. 3 seconds. This proc- ess is repeated for approx. 20 seconds and indicates that the device has a "roll- ing code". The garage door, gate or sim- ilar is not activated when the pro- grammed HomeLink button is depressed. Continue the programming in accordance with the following.

5. Locate the "programming button2" on the receiver for the garage door for example, normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. If you have diffi- culty in finding the button - consult the supplier's manual, or contact the supplier via the Internet: www.homelink.com.

6. Depress and release the "programming button". The button flashes for approx. 30 seconds and the next step must be carried out within this period.

7. Depress the programmed button on HomeLink , while the "programming but- ton" is still flashing, keep it depressed for approx. 3 seconds and then release. Repeat the press/hold/release sequence up to 3 times to conclude the program- ming.

Erasing programming

It is only possible to erase the programming for all the buttons on HomeLink, not for individual buttons.

Depress the two outer buttons and do not release until the indicator lamp starts to flash after approx. 20 seconds. > HomeLink is now set in so-called

"learn mode" and is ready to be pro- grammed once more, see page 81.

2 Button designation and colour vary depending on manufacturer.

84 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on climate control................................................... 86 Manual climate control, AC..................................................................... 88 Electronic climate control, ECC*............................................................. 91 Air distribution......................................................................................... 94 Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*..................................................... 95 Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)....................................................... 98

CLIMATE CONTROL

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

86

Air conditioning

The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. The car is equipped with either manual (AC) or electronic climate control (ECC, Electronic Climate Control).

NOTE

The air conditioning system can be switched off, but to ensure the best possible air in the passenger compartment and pre- vent the windows from misting, it should always be on.

Misting windows

Remove misting on the insides of the windows by first using the defroster function.

To reduce the risk of misting, clean the win- dows with a normal window cleaning agent.

Ice and snow

Remove ice and snow from the climate control air intake (the grille between the bonnet and the windscreen).

Fault tracing and repair

Volvo recommends that you only entrust fault tracing and repair of the climate control system to an authorised Volvo workshop.

Refrigerant

The air conditioning system contains R134a refrigerant. This refrigerant contains no chlo- rine, which means that it is harmless to the ozone layer. The system must only be charged with R134a refrigerant, see also page 278. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out this work.

Passenger compartment filter

All air entering the car's passenger compart- ment is only cleaned with one filter. This must be replaced at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recom- mended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often.

NOTE

There are different types of passenger com- partment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted.

Display

There is a display above the climate control panel. This displays climate control settings.

Personal preferences

You can set preferences for two climate control functions:

Fan speed in AUTO mode (applies only to cars with ECC).

Recirculation timer for passenger com- partment air.

For information about these settings, see page 78.

03 Climate control

General information on climate control

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 87

Air vents in the dashboard

G 01 99 42

Open

Closed

Lateral airflow

Vertical airflow

Aim the outer vents towards the side windows to remove misting from the front side windows.

During cold weather - Close the centre vents for optimum comfort and best demisting.

ECC*

Actual temperature

The temperature you select corresponds to the physical experience with reference to factors such as air speed, humidity and solar radiation in and around the car.

The system includes a sun sensor which detects the side from which the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand air vents despite the con- trols being set for the same temperature on both sides.

Sensor location

The sun sensor is on the top side of the dashboard.

The temperature sensor for the passenger compartment is behind the climate control panel.

The outside temperature sensor is located on the door mirror.

The humidity sensor is located in the inte- rior rearview mirror.

NOTE

Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects.

Side windows and sunroof

To ensure that the air conditioning works sat- isfactorily, close all side windows and the sun- roof (if fitted).

Acceleration

The air conditioning system switches off tem- porarily at full throttle. You may briefly feel a temporary rise in temperature.

Vents in parcel shelf

NOTE

Do not cover the cargo area vents in the parcel shelf with clothing or other objects.

Condensation

In warm weather, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal.

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

88

Control panel

7

1 9

2

3

5

6

8

4

4

G 02 63 08

Fan

Recirculation

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature

Functions

1. Fan

Increase or decrease the fan speed by turning the knob.

If the knob is turned anticlock- wise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are

switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.

2. Recirculation

Recirculation can be used to shut out bad air, exhaust fumes, etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated. No outside air is taken into the car. Recircu-

lation (together with the air conditioning sys- tem) cools the passenger compartment more quickly in hot weather. If the air in the car recir- culates for too long then there is a risk of the windows misting.

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 89

Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing, misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). See page 78, for activating/deactivating the function. When the Defroster (3) program is selected, recirculation is deactivated.

3. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flows to the windows at high fan speed. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.

The following also takes place when the defroster function is activated in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (5)

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

4. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributed to the windows, dashboard vents or floor by pressing the air distribution buttons.

A symbol on the display above the climate control

panel and an illuminated light in the relevant button indicate which function has been selected.

Refer to the table on page 94.

5. AC On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF: The air conditioning is off.

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button). An illumi- nated lamp above ON and OFF respectively in the button shows the function selected.

6. and 7. Heated front seats*

Higher heat:

Press the button once both lights illumi- nate.

Lower heat:

Press the button once one light illumi- nates.

Heat off:

Press the button three times light not illu- minated.

8. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mir- rors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear win- dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto- matically. Switch off manually with one press

03 Climate control

Manual climate control, AC

03

90 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

on the button. Automatic switching off discon- nects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 20 minutes depending on outside tem- perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con- tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually.

9. Temperature

Select cooling or heating for both driver and passenger side.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 91

Control panel

6

7

3

4

9

5

1 10

8

5

2

G 02 63 09

AUTO

Fan

Recirculation/Air quality system

Defroster

Air distribution

AC ON/OFF Air conditioning On/Off

Heated front left seat

Heated front right seat

Rear window and door mirror defrosters

Temperature selector

Functions

1. AUTO

The AUTO function automat- ically regulates climate con- trol and maintains the selected temperature. The AUTO function controls heat- ing, air conditioning, fan speed, recirculation, and air

distribution.

If you select one or more manual functions, the other functions continue to be controlled auto- matically. All manual settings are switched off when AUTO is switched on. The display shows AUTO CLIMATE.

2. Fan

Turn the knob to increase or decrease fan speed. If AUTO

is selected then fan speed is regulated automatically. The previously set fan speed is disengaged.

NOTE

If the knob is turned anticlockwise and the fan indicator in the display goes out, the fan and the air conditioning are switched off. The display shows the fan symbol and OFF.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

92 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

3. Recirculation

The function is selected to shut out bad air, exhaust gases etc. from the passen- ger compartment. The air in the passenger compartment is recirculated, i.e. no outside air is taken into the car when

this function is activated. If the air in the car recirculates for too long, there is a risk of mist- ing on the insides of the windows.

Timer

The timer function reduces the risk of icing, misting and bad air (if recirculation is selected). To activate/deactivate the function see page 78.

NOTE

When Defroster (4) is selected, recirculation is always deactivated.

3. Air quality system*

Same button as recirculation.

The air quality system consists of a multi-filter and a sensor. The filter separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and pollution in the passenger compartment. When the sensor detects polluted outside air, the air intakes are closed and the air in the passenger compartment is recirculated. A green light (A) illuminates in the button when the air quality sensor is active.

Activating the air quality sensor:

Press AUTO (1) to activate the air quality sensor (normal setting).

Or:

Switch between three functions by press- ing repeatedly the recirculation button.

Air quality sensor engaged the light (A) illuminates.

No recirculation engaged, provided it is not required for cooling in hot weather light not illuminated.

Recirculation engaged the light (M) illu- minates.

Keep the following in mind:

As a rule, the air quality sensor should always be engaged.

Recirculation is limited in cold weather to avoid misting.

The defroster functions for the front, side and rear windows can be used to demist the windows.

4. Defroster

Used to quickly remove mist- ing and ice from the wind- screen and side windows. Air flows to the windows at high fan speed. The light in the defroster button illuminates when the function is active.

The following also takes place when the defroster function is activated in order to pro- vide maximum dehumidification in the passen- ger compartment:

the air conditioning (AC) is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button (6)

recirculation is automatically disengaged.

When the defroster is switched off the climate control returns to the previous settings.

5. Air distribution

The airflow can be distributed to the windows, dashboard vents or floor by pressing the air distribution buttons.

03 Climate control

Electronic climate control, ECC*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 93

A symbol on the display above the climate con- trol panel and an illuminated light in the relevant button indicate which function has been selected.

Refer to the table on page 94.

6. AC On/Off (ON/OFF)

ON: The air conditioning is on. It is controlled by the system's AUTO function. This way, incoming air is cooled and dehumidified.

OFF: Off

When the defroster function is activated the air conditioning is automatically switched on (can be switched off with the AC button).

NOTE

The climate control system's demisting function with humidity sensor is significantly reduced with the air conditioning in deacti- vated mode (OFF), as well as with manually selected air distribution and fan speed.

7 and 8. Heated front seats*

To activate front seat heating:

Higher heat:

Press the button once both lights illumi- nate.

Lower heat:

Press the button once one light illumi- nates.

Heat off:

Press the button three times light not illu- minated.

9. Rear window and door mirror

defrosters

Heating is used to quickly remove misting and ice from the rear window and door mir- rors. Press the button once to start simultaneous rear win- dow and rearview mirror defrosting. The function is

active if one lamp is illuminated in the button.

The function is switched off manually or auto- matically. Switch off manually with one press

on the button. Automatic switching off discon- nects the rear window and door mirrors after 12 20 minutes depending on outside tem- perature.

During cold weather the defrosting* also con- tinues after 20 minutes in order to keep the rear window and door mirrors free of ice and mist. The intensity of the defrosting can be adapted to the outside temperature. This function must be switched off manually.

10. Temperature selector

The temperatures on the driver and passenger sides can be set independently.

Press the button once to acti- vate one side only. Press again to activate the other

side. Press the button a third time to activate both sides.

The active side is indicated by the button's light and in the display above the climate control panel.

When the car is started, the most recent setting is resumed.

NOTE

Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature.

03 Climate control

Air distribution

03

94

Air distribution Use: Air distribution Use:

Air to windows. Some air flows from the air vents. The air is not recirculated. Air conditioning is always engaged.

to remove ice and misting quickly.

Air to the floor and windows. Some air flows from the dash- board air vents.

to ensure comfortable conditions and good demisting in cold or humid weather.

Air to windscreen and side windows. Some air flows from the air vents.

to prevent misting and icing in a cold and humid climate. (Not for low fan speed.)

Air to floor and from dash- board air vents.

in sunny weather with cool outside tempera- tures.

Airflow to windows and from dashboard air vents.

to ensure good com- fort in warm, dry weather.

Air to floor. Some air flows to the dashboard air vents and windows.

to warm the feet.

Airflow to the head and chest from the dashboard air vents.

to ensure efficient cooling in warm weather.

Airflow to windows, from dashboard air vents and to the floor.

to provide cooler air for the feet or warmer air to the upper body in cold weather or hot, dry weather.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 95

General information about heaters

The parking heater heats the engine and pas- senger compartment and can be started directly or with the timer.

Two different times can be selected using the timer. Here, time refers to the time when the car is heated and ready. The car's electronic sys- tem calculates when heating should be started based on the outside temperature.

At -10 C or lower the maximum running time of the parking heater is 50 minutes.

WARNING

The car must be outdoors when the petrol or diesel heater is used.

NOTE

When the parking heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

Refuelling

Warning decal on fuel filler flap.

WARNING

Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Check on the information display that the parking heater is switched off. When it is running, the information display shows PARK HEAT ON.

Parking on a hill

If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the parking heater.

Battery and fuel

If the battery has insufficient charge or the fuel level is too low, the parking heater is switched off automatically and a message appears on the information display.

Acknowledge the message by pressing the indicator stalk READ button once.

IMPORTANT

Repeated use of the parking heater com- bined with short journeys may discharge the battery and impair starting.

The car should be driven for the same time as the heater is used to ensure that the car's battery is recharged adequately to replace the energy consumed by the heater when it is used on a regular basis.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

96 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Activating the heater

G 02 90 52

READ button

Thumbwheel1

RESETbutton 1

Symbols and display messages

When one of the timer's settings or Direct start is activated, the infor- mation symbol in the combined instrument panel illuminates and the information display shows an

explanatory text.

Display Specification

FUEL HEATER ON The heater is switched on and running.

TIMER IS SET FOR

FUEL HEATER

Reminder that the heater will start at the set time after the car has been left, when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.

Display Specification

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW BAT-

TERY

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine.

HEATER STOP-

PED LOW FUEL

LEVEL

The heater has been stopped by the car's electronics in order to facilitate starting the engine and driv- ing 50 km.

Direct start and immediate stop

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to DIRECT

START.

2. Press the RESET button to select between ON and OFF.

ON: Parking heater switched on manually or with programmed timer.

OFF: Parking heater switched off.

With the direct start of the heater it will be acti- vated for 50 minutes.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven engine block heater and passenger compartment heater*

03

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 97

Heating of the passenger compartment will begin as soon as the engine coolant has reached the correct temperature.

NOTE

The car can be started and driven while the parking heater is running.

Setting the timer

The time when the car shall be used and heated is specified with the timer.

Select between TIMER 1 and TIMER 2.

1. Scroll with the thumbwheel to PARK

HEAT TIMER 1.

2. Briefly press the RESET button so that the hours setting starts to flash.

3. Select the required hour using the thumb- wheel.

4. Briefly press RESET to move to the flash- ing minutes setting.

5. Select the required minute using the thumbwheel.

6. Briefly press RESET to confirm the setting.

7. Press RESET to activate the timer.

After setting TIMER 1 a second start time can be programmed with TIMER 2 by scrolling with the thumbwheel.

Set the alternative time in the same way as TIMER 1.

Deactivating a timer-started heater

A timer-started heater can be switched off manually before the set time has elapsed. Pro- ceed as follows:

1. Press the READ button.

2. Use the thumbwheel to scroll to the text PARK HEAT TIMER 1 or PARK HEAT

TIMER 2.

The text ON flashes on the display.

3. Press RESET.

The text OFF is shown with a constant glow and the heater is switched OFF.

A timer-started heater can be switched off in accordance with the instructions in the section "Direct start and immediate stop".

Clock/timer

The heater's time is connected to the car's clock.

NOTE

All timer programming will be cleared if the car's clock is reset.

03 Climate control

Fuel-driven auxiliary heater* (diesel)

03

98 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Auxiliary heater (diesel)

In diesel-engined cars the auxiliary heater may be required for achieving the correct tempera- ture in the engine and passenger compartment during cold weather.

The heater starts automatically when extra heat is required when the engine is running.

The heater is switched off automatically when the correct temperature is reached or when the engine is switched off.

NOTE

The auxiliary heater cannot be switched on or off manually but is only controlled by the car's electronics.

When the auxiliary heater is active there may be smoke from underneath the car, which is perfectly normal.

03 Climate control

03

99

100

Front seats ........................................................................................... 102 Interior lighting...................................................................................... 104 Storage spaces in the passenger compartment .................................. 106 Rear seat............................................................................................... 110 Cargo area............................................................................................ 112

INTERIOR

04 Interior

Front seats

04

102 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Seating position, manual seat

The driver's and passenger seats can be adjusted to the optimum sitting and driving positions.

Forward/backward: lift the handle to adjust the distance to the steering wheel and ped- als. Check that the seat is locked after changing the position setting.

Raise/lower the front of the seat cushion (driver's and passenger seat*), pump up/ down.

Raise/lower the seat (driver's and passen- ger seat*), pump up/down.

Lumbar support1 (driver's and passenger seat*), turn the wheel.

Backrest rake: turn the wheel.

Control panel for power seat*.

WARNING

Adjust the position of the driver's seat and adjust the seatbelt, see page 18, before set- ting off, never while driving.

Check that the seat is locked in position.

Seating position, power seat*

G 02 01 99

The seats can be adjusted for a certain time after unlocking the door with the remote con- trol key without the key being inserted into the ignition switch. The seat can always be adjusted in ignition position I or II.

Front edge of seat cushion up/down

Seat, forwards/backwards

Seat, up/down

Backrest rake

An overload protection is deployed if one of the seats is blocked. If this happens, turn off the ignition and wait a short time before adjusting the seat again. Only one of the seat's settings can be adjusted at a time.

1 Also applies to power seat.

04 Interior

Front seats

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 103

Memory function

G 02 02 00

Buttons for memory function.

Store setting

1. Adjust seat.

2. Press and hold button M while pressing button 1, 2 or 3 simultaneously.

Using a stored setting

Press one of the memory buttons 13 until the seat stops. If you release the button then the movement of the seat will stop.

Emergency stop

If the seat accidentally begins to move, press any of the buttons to stop the function.

WARNING

Risk of crushing. Make sure that children do not play with the controls.

Check that there are no objects in front of, behind or under the seat during adjustment.

Ensure that none of the rear seat passen- gers is in danger of becoming trapped.

Memory in remote control key

The settings for the driver's seat are stored in the memory for the remote control key with which the car is locked. When the car is unlocked with the same remote control key the driver's seat adopts the stored settings when the driver's door is opened.

NOTE

The remote control key memory is inde- pendent of seat memory.

Floor mats*

Volvo supplies floor carpets which are espe- cially produced for your car.

WARNING

The floor mat at the driver's seat must be firmly fitted and secured in the attachment clips to prevent it from being trapped around and under the pedals.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

104 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Reading lamps and interior lighting

G 02 02 01

Controls in roof console for front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting.

Reading lamp left-hand, On/Off

Interior lighting

Reading lamp right-hand, On/Off

All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on in ignition position I and II as well as when the engine is running. The lighting can also be activated within 30 minutes after:

the engine has been switched off and the ignition is in position 0

the car has been unlocked but the engine has not been started.

Front roof lighting

The front reading lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button in the roof con- sole.

Rear roof lighting

G 03 08 55

Reading lamps, rear.

Reading lamp left-hand rear, On/Off

Reading lamp right-hand rear, On/Off

The lamps are switched on or off by pressing the relevant button.

Courtesy lighting

Courtesy lighting (and passenger compart- ment lighting) is switched on and off respec- tively when a side door is opened or closed.

Vanity mirror*

G 02 02 10

The lamp is automatically switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed.

Glovebox lighting

Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed.

04 Interior

Interior lighting

04

105

Automatic lighting

Using the switch (2), see page 104, three posi- tions can be selected for the lighting the pas- senger compartment:

Off right-hand side (marked with 0) depressed, automatic lighting switched off.

Neutral position automatic lighting acti- vated. The dimmer function is active.

On left-hand side depressed, passenger compartment lighting on.

Neutral position

When the switch (2) is in neutral position pas- senger compartment lighting is switched on and off automatically in accordance with the below.

The passenger compartment lighting is switched on and remains on for 30 seconds if:

the car is unlocked with the remote control key or key blade.

the engine is stopped and the remote con- trol key is turned to position 0.

Passenger compartment lighting is switched off when:

the engine is started

the car is locked with the key or remote control key.

Passenger compartment lighting comes on and remains on for 5 minutes if one of the doors is open.

If any lighting is switched on manually and the car is locked then it will be switched off auto- matically after 5 minutes.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

106

Storage spaces

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 107

Storage pocket on rear of front seats.

Storage compartment in door panel with cup holder.

Ticket clip

Storage pocket on front edge of front seat cushions.

Glovebox

Storage compartment (e.g. for CD discs and cup holder, *) and storage compart- ment behind the centre console.

Bottle holder*

Coat hanger, only for light garments.

Storage compartment and cup holder.

Storage pocket* on front edge of centre rear seat cushion.

WARNING

Ensure that no hard, sharp or heavy objects lie or protrude in such a way that they could cause injury during heavy braking.

Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps.

Glovebox

G 02 42 08

The owner's manual and maps can be kept here for example. There are also holders for coins, pens and fuel cards.

The glovebox can be locked with the remote control key's detachable key blade. Further information is available on page 117.

Coat hanger

The coat hanger is located on the passenger seat head restraint. Only hang light garments on the hanger.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

108

Storage under the front armrest

G 01 83 71

There is a storage space under the armrest. There is also a smaller storage space in the detachable armrest. Press the small button and lift the armrest to open the shallow com- partment. Press the large button and lift the armrest to open the deeper compartment.

G 02 67 04

In the deeper compartment there is space for 10 normal CD cases. The cases must be stored vertically on the top edge for all 10 to have space.

Cup holder in centre console

G 01 83 72

There is space for a double cup holder under the roller cover. The space can be used for storage by lifting out the cup holder. Lift at the rear edge of the cup holder where there is a recess.

If the cup holder is being fitted - first align its two guide lugs in the two recesses in the front edge of the space and then press down the rear edge of the cup holder.

Close the roller cover by gripping its front edge from below and pulling forward.

04 Interior

Storage spaces in the passenger compartment

04

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 109

Storage compartment behind the gear lever

When there are no buttons for parking assis- tance and BLIS, see page 161 and page 163, the space can be used as a storage com- partment.

WARNING

Objects placed in the storage compart- ments must not obstruct the parking brake lever when it is applied.

Bottle holder*

G 01 74 41

A bottle holder for larger bottles is located on the rear of the tunnel console.

Ashtray*

G 01 96 22

An ashtray is located towards the rear of the tunnel console.

Open the ashtray by pulling the top edge of the cover.

Emptying the ashtray:

1. Press in the catch, see preceding illustra- tion, and tilt the cover up.

2. Then lift the ashtray out.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

110

Head restraint, rear

All head restraints can be adjusted vertically to suit the height of the passenger. The upper edge of the head restraint should be aligned with middle of the back of the head. Raise the head restraint as necessary.

To lower the head restraint, press the button by the right-hand pillar at the same time as push- ing down the head restraint. To remove the head restraint, the button by the right-hand pil- lar must be pressed while lifting out the head restraint.

Tipping the rear seat backrest

IMPORTANT

There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery.

Lowering the backrest.

Rear edge of seat cushion

Lock catch

Lowering the backrest

Location of head restraint under seat cush- ion

IMPORTANT

The head restraints could be damaged if they are not removed for loading. The head restraint in the centre must also be removed for heavy loads.

G 02 07 90

The rear seat backrests can be tipped forwards together, or individually, to make it easier to transport long objects. To avoid damaging the seatbelts when folding the backrests up or down, these should be hooked onto the grab handles.

1. Hang the seatbelts on the hooks before lowering or raising the backrests.

04 Interior

Rear seat

04

111

2. Lift the rear edge of the seat cushion (1) to fold the seat cushions forward.

3. Pull the lock (2) catch up and forward to release the backrest. A red indicator on the lock catch shows that the backrest is no longer locked in place.

4. Fold the backrests (3) forward halfway and remove the head restraints on the outside seats. The centre seat's head restraint must be removed for a fully level floor.

5. Place the head restraints in the plastic sleeves on the undersides (4) of the raised seat cushions.

NOTE

When the backrest has been raised, the red indicator should no longer be showing. If it is still showing then the backrest is not locked in place.

WARNING

Remember to take down the seatbelts once you have raised the backrest.

04 Interior

Cargo area

04

112 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Load retaining eyelets

G 01 80 99

The load retaining eyelets are used to fasten straps or nets to anchor items in the cargo area.

Electrical socket in cargo area*

G 01 49 44

Fold down the cover to access the electrical socket. This socket works regardless of whether or not the ignition is on.

NOTE

Remember not to use the electrical socket with the engine switched off because of the risk of discharging the car's battery.

Bag holder*

G 02 09 02

The bag holder holds shopping bags in place and prevents them tipping over and spilling their contents.

1. Open the hatch in the cargo area.

2. Secure the shopping bags with the strap.

04 Interior

04

113

114 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Remote control key with key blade....................................................... 116 Active locks........................................................................................... 119 Privacy locking* .................................................................................... 120 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 122 Battery in remote control key................................................................ 125 Locking and unlocking ......................................................................... 126 Child safety locks.................................................................................. 129 Alarm* ................................................................................................... 130

LOCKS AND ALARM

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

116

Remote control key

The car is supplied with two remote control keys.

The remote control keys contain detachable metal key blades for mechanical locking/ unlocking of the driver's door and glovebox.

The key blades' unique code is available at authorised Volvo workshops, which are rec- ommended for ordering new key blades.

A maximum of six remote control keys/key blades can be programmed and used for one single car.

Turn signal indication during locking/ unlocking

When the car is unlocked using the remote control key or Keyless drive system, two short flashes of the direction indicators serve to indi- cate that unlocking was correctly performed.

For locking, the indication takes place with one long flash and only if all locks have been locked, after the doors and the boot lid have been closed.

Personal preferences in the menu system can be used to the deactivate indication via the direction indicators. There will then be no visual

indication as to whether the lock status is cor- rect, see page 79.

Loss of a remote control key

If you lose a remote control key, take the car and the other remote control keys to a Volvo workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The code of the missing remote control key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure.

Immobiliser

The remote control keys are fitted with coded chips. The code must be accepted by the reader (receiver) in the ignition switch. The car can only be started if the correct remote control key with the correct code is used.

Remote control key functions

G 01 94 02

Locking Locks all doors and the boot lid. Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close the side windows and the sunroof.

Unlocking Unlocks the doors and the boot lid. Press and hold (at least 4 seconds) to also open the side windows.

Approach lighting Switches on the light- ing at a distance lights up the area around a car parked in a dark location. Press the button once to switch on the interior light- ing, position/parking lamps, number plate lighting and door mirror lamps (option). The lighting is switched off automatically after

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 117

30, 60 or 90 seconds. For information on setting the delay time, see page 79.

Boot lid - Press the button once to unlock the boot lid only.1

Panic function Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the red button for at least three seconds or press it twice within three seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The func- tion can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 sec- onds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 30 seconds.

WARNING

If the sunroof and windows are closed using the remote control key, check that no one is in danger of getting hands caught.

IMPORTANT

The narrow section of the remote control key is particularly sensitive - this contains the chip. The car cannot be started if the chip is damaged.

Detachable key blade

G 01 94 03

Using the remote control key's detachable key blade:

the driver's door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, see page 123.

access to the glovebox and cargo area (privacy locking) is blocked, see pages 118 and 120.

the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated/deactivated, see page 129.

PACOS* activated/deactivated, see page 24.

Removing the key blade

To remove the key blade from the remote con- trol key:

Slide the spring-loaded catch to the side.

Pull out the key blade at the same time.

Attaching the key blade

Be careful when inserting the key blade into the remote control key.

1. Hold the remote control key with the nar- row end pointing down and lower the key blade into its slot.

2. Lightly press the key blade to lock it in position. You should hear a "click".

Unlocking doors with the key blade

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be unlocked and opened as follows:

1. Insert the key blade in the driver's door keyhole.

2. Turn the blade 45 degrees clockwise and open the door.

1 The function unlocks the boot lid it does not open.

05 Locks and alarm

Remote control key with key blade

05

118

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 131.

Locking the glovebox

G 02 00 34

The glovebox is locked.

The glovebox can only be locked/unlocked using the remote control key's detachable key blade. (For information on the key blade, see page 117.)

Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

Turn the key blade 90 degrees clockwise. The keyhole is horizontal in the locked position.

Pull out the key blade.

Unlocking takes place in reverse order.

For information on privacy locking, see page 120.

NOTE

The remote control key cannot unlock the glovebox without the key blade.

This function is particularly useful for when the car is left for service, at a hotel or similar.

05 Locks and alarm

Active locks

05

119

G 01 94 22

Active locks for remote control key with

key blade.

Active locks for remote control key with-

out key blade and with privacy locking activated.

05 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

05

120 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on privacy locking

The privacy locking function is intended for when the car is left for service, with a hotel parking valet or similar. The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid lock is disconnected from the central locking - the cargo area cannot be opened with either the central locking but- ton on the driver's door or the remote control key.

This means that the remote control key without key blade can only be used to activate/deacti- vate the alarm, to open the doors and to drive the car.

The remote control key without key blade can then be handed over to the service or hotel staff - the loose key blade is retained by the car owner.

Activate privacy locking

G 02 00 32

Privacy locking activated.

1. Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key, see page 117.

2. Insert the key blade in the glovebox lock.

3. Turn the key blade 180 degrees clock- wise. The keyhole is vertical in the locked position for privacy locking.

4. Pull out the key blade.

The glovebox is then locked and the boot lid can no longer be unlocked with the remote control key or the central locking button.

Rear seat backrests

NOTE

Do not forget to lock the rear seat backrest. Do not reinsert the key blade into the remote control key - keep it in a safe place.

In order that the cargo area with privacy locking cannot be reached from the passenger com- partment, the opening mechanism in both rear seat backrests must be locked with the key blade.

Lock the left-hand backrest by turning the key blade clockwise, the right-hand back- rest is locked by turning the key blade anti- clockwise.

Deactivate privacy locking

To reconnect the boot lid to the central locking automatic function, proceed as follows:

1. Insert the remote control key's detachable key blade into the glovebox keyhole and turn 180 degrees anticlockwise.

2. Unlock the rear seat backrest.

3. Refit the key blade into the remote control key, see page 117.

Following which, the glovebox is unlocked and all central locking functions are again con-

05 Locks and alarm

Privacy locking*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 121

trolled by the remote control key and the cen- tral locking button on the driver's door.

For information on locking the glovebox only, see page 118.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

122 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Keyless lock and ignition system

G 01 94 23

The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key. You simply need to have the remote control key with you in a pocket or a bag.

The system makes it easier and more conven- ient to open the car, for example with shopping bags in one hand and a child in the other. It saves you having to take out or look for the remote control key.

The two remote control keys incorporate the keyless drive function. You can order addi- tional remote controls. The keyless drive sys- tem can handle up to six remote controls.

Remote control key max. 1.5 m from the

car

In order to open a door or the boot lid, a remote control key must be no more than approx. 1.5 m from the car door handle or boot lid.

This means that the person who wishes to open a door must have the remote control key with him or her. It is not possible to open a door if the remote control key is on the other side of the car.

The grey area in the illustration indicates the range covered by the system's antennas.

If someone leaves the car and takes a keyless drive remote control key with them, a warning message appears on the information display and a reminder signal sounds. The warning message disappears when the remote control key is brought back to the car or when the igni- tion dial is turned to position 0. The warning is only issued if the ignition dial is in position I or II after someone has opened and closed a door.

The warning message and reminder signal dis- appear when the remote control key is brought back to the car after one of the following actions:

a door has been opened and closed

the ignition dial has been turned to position 0

the READ button has been pressed.

Never leave any remote control key in the

car

If a remote control key with keyless drive func- tion is left in the car, it is made passive when the car is locked. This prevents unauthorised entry.

If someone breaks into the car and finds the remote control key, it can be activated and used again. It is therefore important to handle all remote control keys with equal care.

Interference to remote control key

function

Electromagnetic screening and fields can inter- fere with the keyless drive system. To avoid this: do not place the remote control key near mobile phones, metallic objects or, for exam- ple, in a metal briefcase.

If interference is experienced nonetheless, use the remote control key and key blade in the normal way, see page 116.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 123

Locking

G 02 00 33

Cars with the keyless system have a button on the outside door handles.

When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas, the doors and the boot lid are locked as follows:

Push in the lock button on one of the door handles.

All doors must be closed before the lock button is pushed in. Otherwise they will not lock.

When the car is locked, the lock buttons on the inside of the doors retract.

NOTE

On cars with the keyless drive system and automatic transmission the gear selector must be moved to the P position and the ignition dial turned to the 0 position. Other- wise the car cannot be locked or alarmed.

Unlocking

When the remote control key is within the range covered by the system's antennas:

1. Open the doors by pulling the relevant han- dle.

2. Open the boot lid by pressing under the boot lid opening button and lift the boot lid.

If for some reason the keyless drive function in the remote control key is not operating, the car can be unlocked using the remote control key functions, see page 116.

Power seat remote control key with

memory function

If several people with keyless drive remote control keys get into the car, then the driver's seat will be adjusted for the person who opens the door first.

Unlocking doors with the key blade

G 02 02 25

If central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key, e.g. if the batteries are dis- charged, then the driver's door can be opened as follows:

1. To access the keyhole: Carefully prize out the plastic cover in the handle by inserting the key blade in the hole on the bottom of the cover.

2. Unlock the door using the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Keyless drive*

05

124 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

NOTE

When the driver's door is unlocked using the key blade and is opened, the alarm is trig- gered. It is switched off by inserting the remote control key in the ignition switch, see page 131.

Antenna location

G 02 00 76

The keyless system has a number of integrated antennae located around the car:

Rear bumper, inside centre

Door handle, left-hand rear

Cargo area, central and furthest in under the floor

Door handle, right-hand rear

Centre console, under the rear section

Centre console, under the front section

WARNING

People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm to the keyless system's antennae with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system.

Personal preferences

The Keyless Drive system can have personal preferences applied, see page 79.

05 Locks and alarm

Battery in remote control key

05

125

Low battery in remote control key

When the battery runs down and full function- ality cannot be guaranteed, the information symbol and display show KEY BATTERY

LOW VOLTAGE or CAR KEY - CHANGE

BATTERY.

Changing the remote control key battery

G 01 94 06

If the locks repeatedly fail to respond to signals from the remote control key at a normal dis- tance, the battery should be replaced (type CR 2450, 3 V).

1. Place the remote control key with the key- pad downward and prize up the cover using a small screwdriver.

2. Remove the cover.

3. Carefully examine how the battery's (+) and () sides are fitted (there is a diagram under the cover).

4. Prize out and change the battery. Avoid touching the battery and its terminals with your fingers.

5. Refit the cover and press it in.

Dispose of the old battery in an environmen- tally-responsible manner.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

126 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Locking/unlocking the car from outside

For cars with the Keyless system, see page 122.

Unlocking

Using the remote control key's unlock button the car can be unlocked in two different ways (select in personal settings, see page 79):

One press unlocks the doors and the boot lid

One press unlocks the driver's door and a second press unlocks the other doors and the boot lid.

Locking

The remote control key's lock button locks the doors and boot lid simultaneously.

NOTE

The car can be locked even if the boot lid is open * - when the boot lid is then closed there is a risk that the keys will be locked in*.

WARNING

Be aware that you can be locked in the car if it is locked from the outside with the remote control key. You cannot then leave the car using any of the controls inside the car.

Rapid closing

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) on the remote control key's lock button to close all windows and sunroof* at the same time.

Boot lid

Unlocking

Unlocking boot lid only:

Press the remote control key's button to unlock the boot lid.

Locking

If the doors are locked when the boot lid is closed then it remains unlocked. Lock with the remote control key's lock button or from inside to lock both doors and the boot lid.

Automatic relocking

If none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, all are locked again automatically (does not apply to locking from inside). This function reduces the risk that the car is left unlocked unintentionally. (For cars with alarm, see page 131.)

Locking/unlocking the car from inside

G 00 74 51

With the central locking button on the driver's door, the doors and boot lid can be locked or unlocked simultaneously.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 127

Unlocking

A door cannot be unlocked by pulling up its lock button.

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button .

Global opening

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button .

A long press (at least 4 seconds) also opens all the side windows simultaneously - for example, to quickly ventilate the pas- senger compartment during hot weather.

Locking

Press the lower section of the central lock- ing button .

Press and hold (at least 2 seconds) to also close all windows and the sunroof* at the same time.

All doors can be locked with each respective door's lock button.

Opening the doors

When the doors are locked from the inside:

Pull the handle twice to unlock and open the door.

Automatic locking

When the speed of the car exceeds 7 km/h the doors and boot lid are locked automatically.

When the function is activated and the doors have been locked they can be opened in two ways:

Pull one of the door handles twice

Press the upper section of the central lock- ing button and pull the door handle.

The function can be activated/deactivated by means of personal preferences, see page 79.

Deadlocks *1

When deadlocked, the doors cannot be opened from the inside if they are locked with the remote control key.

The deadlocks are activated with the remote control key and are set after a 10-25 second delay after the doors have been locked.

The car can only be unlocked from a deadlock state with the remote control key. The driver's door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade.

Temporary deactivation

A

D

B

C

E

G 02

63 07

Active menu options are indicated with a cross.

Display

MENU

EXIT

1 Only in combination with alarm.

05 Locks and alarm

Locking and unlocking

05

128 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

ENTER

Navigation

If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the deadlocks function can be temporarily switched off.

This is carried out as follows:

1. Access the menu system under Car

settings (for a detailed description of the menu system, see page 79).

2. Select Reduced guard.

3. Select Activate once: The instrument panel display shows the message Reduced guard - See manual and the deadlocks function is switched off when the car is locked.

or

Select Ask on exit: Each time the key is turned to position 0 the audio system dis- play shows the message Press ENTER to

reduce guard until engine is started.

EXIT to cancel - select one of the options:

If the deadlocks function shall be switched off: Press ENTER and lock the car. Note that the alarm's* movement and tilt detec- tors are switched off at the same time, see page 131.

The next time the remote control key is turned to key position II the system is reset to zero and the instrument panel display shows the mes- sage Full guard at which the deadlocks func- tion and the alarm's movement and tilt detec- tors* are re-engaged.

or

If the locking system shall not be changed: Select no options at all and lock the car. Or press EXIT and lock the car.

NOTE

Remember that the car's alarm is armed when the car is locked.

If any of the doors are opened from the inside then the alarm will be triggered.

WARNING

Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the deadlocks to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in.

05 Locks and alarm

Child safety locks

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 129

Manual select, child lock, rear doors

G 01 46 97

Manual child lock in left-hand rear door.

The door cannot be opened from inside.

The door can be opened from inside.

The child safety lock controls are found on the trailing edge of the rear doors and are only accessible when the doors are open.

To activate or deactivate the child safety locks:

1. Remove the remote control key's key blade.

2. Turn the control using the key blade.

Electrical locking of the rear doors and power windows*

Driver's door control panel.

When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear:

windows can only be opened with the driv- er's door control panel

doors cannot be opened from inside.

1. Child safety locks are activated in key posi- tion I or II.

2. Press the switch on the driver's door.

A message appears on the information dis- play.

The lamp in the button illuminates when the lock is active.

NOTE

Cars with electric child safety locks do not also have manual child locks.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

130 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Alarm system

When the alarm is armed, it continually moni- tors all alarm inputs.

The alarm is triggered if:

a door, the bonnet or boot lid is opened

a non-approved key is used in the ignition or if an attempt is made to force the lock

a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector)

the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector)

the battery's cable is disconnected

anyone tries to disconnect the siren.

Alarm indicator

G 02 02 27

A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status:

LED not lit the alarm is not armed.

The LED flashes once every other second Alarm is armed.

The LED flashes rapidly after disarming the alarm and until key position II is activated the alarm has been triggered.

If there is a fault in the alarm system, a message appears on the display. At which point you should contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Do not attempt to repair or modify alarm system components. All such attempts could affect the terms of insurance.

Arming the alarm

Press the remote control key lock button. A long flash from the car's direction indi- cators confirms that the alarm is armed and that the doors are locked.

IMPORTANT

The alarm is fully armed when the car's direction indicators have made one long flash and the LED on the instrument panel flashes once every other second.

Disarming the alarm

Press the remote control key unlock but- ton. Two short flashes from the car's direc- tion indicators confirm that the alarm is disarmed and that the doors are unlocked.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 131

Automatic re-arming of the alarm

This function prevents the car being left with alarm disarmed unintentionally.

If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (and the alarm is disarmed) but none of the doors or the boot lid is opened within 2 minutes, then the alarm is automatically re- armed. The car is relocked at the same time.

Deactivating a triggered alarm

Press the unlock button on the remote control key or insert the key in the ignition switch.

Confirmation is given by two short flashes from the direction indicators.

Alarm signals

When the alarm is triggered, the following hap- pens:

A siren sounds for less than 25 seconds. The siren has its own battery which is used if the car battery has insufficient charge or is disconnected.

The direction indicators flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is deactivated.

Remote control key not working

G 01 94 20

If for some reason the remote control key is not working, the alarm can still be switched off and the car started as follows:

1. Open the driver's door with the key blade. The alarm is triggered and the siren sounds.

2. On cars with the keyless drive system: First remove the knob by pressing in the catch (1) and pulling out (2).

3. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch (3). The alarm is deactivated. The alarm light flashes rapidly until the remote control key is turned to key position II.

Reduced alarm level

To avoid inadvertently triggering of the alarm - for example when leaving a dog in the car or during a ferry crossing - the movement and tilt detectors can be temporarily switched off.

The procedure is the same as with the tempo- rary disengaging of deadlocks, see page 127

Testing the alarm system

Testing the movement detector in the

passenger compartment

1. Open all the windows.

2. Arm the alarm. Activation of the alarm is confirmed by the lamp flashing slowly.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Test the movement detector in the pas- senger compartment, such as by lifting out a bag from a seat. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for doors

1. Arm the alarm.

2. Please wait 30 seconds.

3. Unlock the driver's door with the key blade.

05 Locks and alarm

Alarm*

05

132 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Open one of the doors. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

Test of alarm for bonnet

1. Sit in the car and deactivate the movement detector.

2. Arm the alarm. Remain in the car and lock the doors with the button on the remote control key.

3. Please wait 30 seconds.

4. Open the bonnet with the handle under the dashboard. A siren should sound and all direction indicators should flash.

5. Deactivate the alarm by unlocking the car with the remote control key.

05 Locks and alarm

05

133

134 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 136 Refuelling.............................................................................................. 138 Alcoguard * ......................................................................................... 142 Starting the engine ............................................................................... 146 Starting the engine Flexifuel............................................................... 148 Keyless drive*........................................................................................ 150 Manual gearbox.................................................................................... 151 Automatic gearbox................................................................................ 152 Brake system........................................................................................ 157 DSTC Stability and traction control system* ..................................... 159 Park Assist*........................................................................................... 161 BLIS* Blind Spot Information System ............................................... 163 Towing and recovery............................................................................. 166 Start assistance.................................................................................... 168 Driving with a trailer.............................................................................. 169 Towing equipment* .............................................................................. 171 Detachable towbar* ............................................................................. 173 Loading................................................................................................. 177 Adjusting headlamp pattern ................................................................. 178

STARTING AND DRIVING

06 Starting and driving

General

06

136 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Economical driving

Driving economically means driving smoothly while thinking ahead and adjusting your driving style and speed to the prevailing conditions. For more advice on reducing environmental impact. see page 14.

Do not run the engine to operating tem- perature at idling speed, but rather drive with a light load as soon as possible - a cold engine consumes more fuel than a warm one.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather - the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature more quickly.

Avoid sudden unnecessary acceleration and heavy braking.

Do not drive with unnecessary loads in the car.

Remove the load carriers when not in use.

Do not use winter tyres when the winter season is over.

Avoid driving with open windows.

Slippery driving conditions

Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts.

Engine, gearbox and cooling system

Under special conditions, for example hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat - in particular with a heavy load.

For supplementary information about over- heating when driving with a trailer, see page 169.

In the event of a risk of overheating a built- in protection function in the gearbox is acti- vated which, amongst other things, illumi- nates the instrument panel's yellow infor- mation lamp and there is a text message displayed there regarding appropriate action - follow the recommendation given.

If the temperature gauge for the engine's cooling system goes into the red zone - stop and let the engine idle for a few minutes.

Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates.

If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily.

Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive.

NOTE

It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a while after the engine has been switched off.

Diesel engine 1.6D

When driving with a major load in a hot climate, the engine cooling fan can be replaced with one of a greater capacity than the standard model. Check with your nearest Volvo dealer regarding the options for your car.

Open boot lid

WARNING

Do not drive with the boot lid open. Toxic exhaust fumes can be drawn into the car through the cargo area.

Driving in water

The car can be driven through water at a maxi- mum depth of 25 cm at a maximum speed of 10 km/h. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water.

06 Starting and driving

General

06

137

IMPORTANT

Engine damage can occur if water enters the air filter.

In greater depths, water can enter the trans- mission. This reduces the lubricating ability of the oils and shortens the service life of the systems.

When driving in water, maintain a low speed and do not stop the car. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function.

Clean the electric contacts of the electric engine block heater and trailer coupling after driving in water and mud.

IMPORTANT

Do not let the car stand with water over the sills for any long period of time. This could cause electrical malfunctions.

In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Tow the car from the water.

Do not overload the battery

The electrical functions in the car load the bat- tery to varying degrees. Avoid having the remote control key in key position II when the engine is switched off. Instead use the I mode - which uses less power.

Note that the 12 volt outlet in the cargo area supplies power even when the remote control key has been removed from the ignition switch.

Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the engine is switched off. Examples of such functions are:

ventilation fan

windscreen wipers

audio system (high volume)

headlamps.

If the battery voltage is low the information dis- play shows the text LOW BATTERY POWER

SAVE MODE. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system.

In which case, charge the battery by star- ting the engine and then running it for at least 15 minutes - battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

138

Opening the fuel filler flap

Don not forget to switch off the fuel-driven heater before refuelling!

Open the fuel filler flap with the button on the lighting panel, see page 58. The engine must be switched off before the flap can be opened. The fuel flap is located on the rear right wing.

Closing

Push in the flap until you hear a click.

Fuel cap

1. Turn the fuel cap until an obvious resis- tance is felt.

2. Turn past the resistance until it comes to a stop.

3. Take out the cap.

4. Hang up the cap on the inside of the fuel filler flap.

NOTE

Put the petrol cap back on after refuelling. Turn until one or more clear clicks are heard.

Filling up with fuel

Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out.

NOTE

Excess fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather.

Fuel of a lower quality than that specified should not be used as engine power and fuel consumption could be negatively affected, for more information see the following section Fuel.

General information on fuel

WARNING

Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and get- ting fuel splashes in the eyes.

In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention.

Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swal- lowed.

WARNING

Fuel which spills on to the ground can be ignited by the exhaust fumes.

Switch off the fuel-driven heater before star- ting to refuel.

Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

139

IMPORTANT

Mixing different types of fuel or the use of fuel not recommended invalidates Volvo's guarantees, and any associated service agreement. This applies to all engines. NOTE: It does not apply to cars with engines that are adapted to run on ethanol fuel (E85).

CO2 emissions, fuel consumption and tank vol- ume, see page 280

Catalytic converter

The purpose of the catalytic converter is to purify exhaust gases. It is located in the flow of exhaust gases close to the engine so that it quickly reaches operating temperature. The catalytic converter consists of a monolith (ceramic or metal) with channels. The channel walls are lined with a thin layer of platinum/rho- dium/palladium. These metals act as catalysts, i.e. they participate in and accelerate a chem- ical reaction without being used up them- selves.

Lambda-sondTM oxygen sensor

The Lambda-sond is part of a control system intended to reduce emissions and improve fuel economy.

An oxygen sensor monitors the oxygen content of the exhaust gases leaving the engine. This value is fed into an electronic system that con-

tinuously controls the injectors. The ratio of fuel to air directed to the engine is continuously adjusted. These adjustments create optimal conditions for efficient combustion of harmful emissions (hydrocarbons, carbon monoxide and nitrous oxides) using the three-way cata- lytic converter.

Petrol

Petrol must meet the EN 228 standard. Most engines can be run with octane ratings of 91, 95 and 98 RON.

91 RON must not be used for 4-cylinder engines and should only be used in excep- tional cases with other engines.

95 RON can be used for normal driving.

98 RON is recommended for optimum per- formance and minimum fuel consumption.

When driving in temperatures above +38 C, fuel with the highest possible octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy.

IMPORTANT

Always refuel with unleaded petrol so as not to damage the catalytic converter.

Do not use additives not recommended by Volvo.

Bioethanol E85

Do not modify the fuel system or its compo- nents, and do not replace components with parts that are not specifically designed for use with bioethanol.

WARNING

Methanol must not be used. A decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap shows the correct alternative fuel.

The use of components not designed for bioethanol engines could cause fire, injury or engine damage.

Reserve fuel can

The reserve fuel can should be filled with petrol, see the NOTE box, page 148.

IMPORTANT

Make sure the reserve fuel can is securely fastened and that its cap is sealed.

WARNING

Ethanol is sensitive to sparks, and explosive gases could form in the reserve fuel can if it is refuelled with ethanol.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

140

Diesel

Diesel must meet the EN 590 or JIS K2204 standards.

IMPORTANT

Only ever use fuel that fulfils the European diesel standard.

IMPORTANT

Diesel type fuels which must not be used: special additives, Marine Diesel Fuel, fuel oil, RME1 (Rape Methyl Ester) and vegetable oil. These fuels do not fulfil the requirements in accordance with Volvo recommendations and generate increased wear and engine damage that is not covered by the Volvo warranty.

Diesel engines are sensitive to contaminants, such as excessively high volumes of sulphur particles for example. Only use diesel fuel from well-known producers. Never use diesel of dubious quality.

At low temperatures (-40 C to -6 C), a paraffin precipitate may form in the diesel fuel, which may lead to ignition problems. Special diesel fuel designed for low temperatures around freezing point is available from the major oil

companies. This fuel is less viscous at low tem- peratures and reduces the risk of paraffin pre- cipitate.

IMPORTANT

Use special winter grade fuel during cold months.

The risk of condensation in the fuel tank is reduced if the tank is kept well filled. When refuelling, check that the area around the fuel filler pipe is clean. Avoid spilling fuel onto the paintwork. Wash off any spillage with deter- gent and water.

IMPORTANT

The sulphur content must be a maximum of 50 ppm.

Empty tank

The design of the fuel system in a diesel engine means that if the vehicle runs out of fuel, the tank may need to be vented in the workshop in order to restart the engine after fuelling.

Once the engine has stopped due to fuel star- vation, the fuel system needs a few moments to carry out a check. Do this before starting the

engine, once the fuel tank has been filled with diesel:

1. Insert the remote control key in the ignition switch and turn to key position II (see page 146).

2. Wait approx. 1 minute. 3. To start the engine: Depress the brake and/

or clutch pedal, and turn the remote control key to start position III.

Draining condensation from the fuel filter

The fuel filter separates condensation from the fuel. Condensation can disrupt engine opera- tion.

The fuel filter must be drained at the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet or if you suspect that the car has been filled with contaminated fuel.

IMPORTANT

Certain special additives remove the water separation in the fuel filter.

Diesel particle filter (DPF)

Diesel cars may be equipped with a particle fil- ter, which results in more efficient emission control. The particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the filter during normal driving. So-

1 Diesel fuel may contain a certain amount of RME, but further amounts must not be added.

06 Starting and driving

Refuelling

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 141

called "regeneration" is started in order to burn away the particles and empty the filter. This requires the engine to have reached normal operating temperature.

Regeneration of the filter takes place automat- ically at an interval of approximately 300 900 km depending on driving conditions. Regeneration normally takes 10 - 20 minutes. It may take a little longer at a low average speed. Fuel consumption may increase slightly during regeneration.

The rear window heating may be activated automatically to increase the load on the engine during regeneration without warning.

Regeneration in cold weather

If the car is frequently driven short distances in cold weather then the engine does not reach normal operating temperature. This means that regeneration of the diesel particle filter does not take place and the filter is not emptied.

When the filter has become approximately 80% full of particles, the yellow information symbol on the instrument panel illuminates, and the message SOOT FILTER

FULL SEE OWNER MANUAL is shown on the instrument panel display.

Start regeneration of the filter by driving the car until the engine reaches normal operating tem- perature, preferably on a main road or motor-

way. The car should then be driven for approx- imately 20 minutes more.

NOTE

A smaller reduction of engine power may be noticed temporarily during regeneration.

When regeneration is complete the message is cleared automatically.

IMPORTANT

If the filter fills up it may be incapable of functioning. Then it can be difficult to start the engine and there is a risk that the filter will have to be replaced.

Use the parking heater* in cold weather so that the engine reaches normal operating tempera- ture more quickly.

06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard *

06

142 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information on the Alcolock

The function of the Alcolock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcolock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally.

WARNING

The Alcolock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely.

Functions

1. Nozzle for breath test. 2. Switch. 3. Transmission button. 4. Lamp for battery status. 5. Lamp for result of breath test. 6. Lamp indicates ready for breath test.

Operation

Battery

Alcolock indicator lamp (4) shows battery sta- tus:

Lamp (4) Battery status

Green flashing Charging in pro- gress

Green Fully charged

Yellow Semi-charged

Red Discharged - fit the charger in the holder or connect the power supply cable from the glovebox.

NOTE

Store the Alcolock in its holder. This will keep the built-in battery fully charged and the Alcolock is activated automatically when the car is opened.

Before starting the engine

The Alcolock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened.

06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard *

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 143

1. When indicator lamp (6) is green the Alco- lock is ready for use.

2. Withdraw the Alcolock from its holder. If the Alcolock is outside the car when it is unlocked then it must first be activated with the switch (2).

3. Fold up the nozzle (1), take a deep breath and blow with an even pressure until a "click" is heard after approx. 5 seconds. The result will be one of the alternatives in the following table Result after breath

test. 4. If no message is shown then the transmis-

sion to the car may have failed - in which case, press button (3) to transmit the result to the car manually.

5. Fold down the nozzle and refit the Alcolock in its holder.

6. Start the engine following an approved breath test within 5 minutes - otherwise it must be repeated.

Result after breath test

Lamp (5) + Dis- play text

Specification

Green lamp + ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Start the engine - no alcohol content measured.

Yellow lamp + ALCOGUARD

APPROVED TEST

Engine starting pos- sible - measured alcohol content is above 0.1 promille but below the limit value in forceA.

Red lamp + DISAP-

PROVED TEST

WAIT 1 MINUTE

Engine starting not possible - measured alcohol content is above the limit value in forceA.

A See the section, General information on the Alcolock, page 142

NOTE

After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test.

To bear in mind

Before the breath test

In order to obtain correct function and as accu- rate a measurement result as possible:

Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test.

Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result.

Change of driver

In order to ensure that a new breath test is car- ried out in the event of a change of driver - depress the switch (2) and the send button (3) simultaneously for approx. 3 seconds. At which point the car returns to start inhibition mode and a new approved breath test is required before starting the engine.

Calibration and service

The Alcolock must be checked and calibrated at a workshop1 every 12 months.

30 days before recalibration is necessary the display shows ALCOGUARD CALIBR.

REQUIRED. If calibration is not carried out within these 30 days then normal engine star- ting will be blocked - only starting with the

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard *

06

144 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Bypass function will then be possible, see page 144 section Emergency situation.

The message can be cleared by pressing the send button (3) once. Otherwise it goes out on its own after approx. 2 minutes but then reap- pears each time the engine is started - only recalibration at a workshop1 can clear the mes- sage permanently.

Cold or hot weather

The colder the weather the longer it takes before the Alcolock is ready for use:

Temperature (C) Maximum heat- ing time (sec-

onds)

+10 +85 10

5 +10 60

40 5 180

At temperatures below -20 C or above +60 C the Alcolock requires additional power supply. The display shows ALCOGUARD

INSERT POWER CABLE. In which case, con- nect the power supply cable from the glovebox and wait until indicator lamp (6) is green.

In extremely cold weather the heating time can be reduced by taking the Alcolock indoors.

Emergency situation

In the event of an emergency situation, or if the Alcolock is out of order or has been removed, it is possible to bypass the Alcolock in order to drive the car.

NOTE

All Bypass activation is logged and saved in memory, see page 12 in the section, Recording data.

After the Bypass function has been activated the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED the whole time while driving and can only be reset by a workshop1.

The Bypass function can be tested without the error message being logged - in which case, carry out all the steps without starting the car. The error message is cleared when the car is locked.

When the Alcolock is installed, either the Bypass or Emergency function is selected as the bypassing option. This setting can be changed afterwards at a workshop1.

Activating the Bypass function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display first shows BYPASS ACTIVATED WAIT 1 MINUTE

and then ALCOGUARD BYPASS

ENABLED - after which the engine can be started.

This function can be activated several times. The error message shown during driving can only be cleared at a workshop1.

Activating the Emergency function

Depress and hold the left-hand stalk switch READ button and the button for hazard warning flashers simultaneously for approx. 5 seconds - the display shows ALCOGUARD BYPASS ENABLED and the engine can be started.

This function can only be used once, after which a reset must be made at a workshop1.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Alcoguard *

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 145

Symbols and display messages

In addition to the previously described mes- sages, the combined instrument panel's dis- play can also show the following:

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

RESTART POSSI-

BLE

The engine has been switched off for less than 30 minutes - engine starting pos- sible without new test.

ALCOGUARD

SERVICE

REQUIRED

Contact a work- shop1.

ALCOGUARD NO

SIGNAL

Transmission failed - send manually with button (3) or take a new breath test.

ALCOGUARD

INVALID TEST

Test failed - take a new breath test.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW LONGER

Blowing too short - blow for longer.

ALCOGUARD

BLOW SOFTER

Blowing too hard - blow more gently.

Display text Meaning/Action

ALCOGUARD

BLOW HARDER

Blowing too weak - blow harder.

ALCOGUARD

WAIT PREHEAT-

ING

Heating not finished - wait for text ALCOGUARD

BLOW 5 SEC-

ONDS.

1 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

146 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Before starting the engine

Apply the parking brake.

Note that if the car is equipped with an alcolock then a breath test must first be approved before the engine can be started, see page 142.

Automatic gearbox

Move the gear selector in position P or N.

Manual gearbox

Put the gear lever in neutral and hold the clutch pedal fully depressed. This is particularly important in very cold conditions.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock could otherwise be activated, making it impossi- ble to steer the car.

The remote control key must be in key posi- tion II when the car is being towed.

NOTE

The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is in order that the emis- sions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment.

Starting the engine

Petrol

Turn the remote control key to key position III. If the engine does not start within 510 seconds, release the key and try again.

Diesel

1. Turn the remote control key to key position II. > An indicator symbol in the combined

instrument panel shows that engine pre- heating is underway, see page 51.

2. Turn the ignition key to position III when the indicator symbol goes out.

Autostart *

With the autostart function, there is no need to hold the remote control key (or ignition dial on cars with Keyless Drive, see page 122) in key position III until the engine has started.

Turn the ignition key to the start position III and just release it - the starter motor then works automatically until the engine has started.

NOTE

If the diesel engine is started in extreme cold without waiting for engine preheating, then the automatic start sequence can be delayed for a couple of seconds.

Key positions

0 Locked position

The steering lock is activated when the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch.

I Radio position

Steering lock deactivated. Certain functions can be used. The engine's electrical system is not activated.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine

06

147

II Driving position

The remote control key's position when driving. The whole electrical system is engaged.

III Start position

The starter motor is activated. The remote control key is released when the engine has started and then springs back to drive position.

A ticking sound can be heard if the key reaches an intermediate position - in which case, turn the key to position II and back to get rid of the sound.

When the steering lock is activated

If the front wheels are positioned so that there is tension in the steering lock then the infor- mation display may show a warning message and the car cannot be started. In which case, proceed as follows:

1. Remove the remote control key from the ignition switch and turn the steering wheel so that the tension is released.

2. Hold the steering wheel in this position. Reinsert the key and make a new attempt to start the car.

WARNING

Never remove the remote control key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed. The steering lock would be activated, making it impossible to steer the car.

WARNING

Always remove the remote control key from the ignition switch when leaving the car, especially if there are children in the car.

Remote control keys and electronic immobiliser

The remote control key must not hang with other keys or metal objects on the same key ring. The electronic immobiliser could be acti- vated accidentally.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine Flexifuel

06

148 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General information about starting with Flexifuel

The engine is started in the same way as in a petrol-engined car, see page 146.

NOTE

The immobiliser is activated in the event of repeated start attempts. Before a new start attempt is made the key/dial must first be turned back to position I or 0.

In the event of starting difficulties

If the engine does not start at the first start attempt, proceed as follows:

1. Depress the accelerator pedal 1/3 to 1/2.

2. Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to key position III.

3. When the engine has started, ease the accelerator pedal gradually as the engine speed increases.

If the engine has not started after

10 seconds, second attempt

Turn the remote control key/ignition dial to key position III until the engine starts, but not longer than 60 seconds.

If the engine still does not start

Please wait for one minute, fully depress the accelerator pedal and repeat the pre- vious procedure.

IMPORTANT

If the engine does not start despite repeated start attempts, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Engine block heater*

Electrical input to the engine block heater.

When the temperature is expected to be lower than 10 C and the car has been refuelled with bioethanol E85, an engine block heater should be used for about 2 hours to facilitate the quick starting of the engine.

The lower the temperature, the longer the time required with the engine block heater. At -20 C the heater should be used for approx. 3 hours.

Cars intended for E85 have an electric engine block heater*. Starting and driving with a pre- heated engine involves significantly lower emissions and reduced fuel consumption. For this reason you should aim to use the engine block heater throughout the winter months.

WARNING

The engine block heater is powered by high voltage. Fault tracing and repair of an elec- tric engine block heater and its electrical connections must only be carried out by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

NOTE

Points to remember for carrying reserve fuel:

In the event of stalling due to an empty fuel tank, bioethanol E85 from a reserve fuel can may make the engine difficult to start in extreme cold. This is avoided by filling the reserve fuel can with 95 octane petrol.

06 Starting and driving

Starting the engine Flexifuel

06

149

For more information on Flexifuel's bioethanol E85 fuel, see page 139.

Fuel adaptation

If the fuel tank is filled with petrol after the car has been driven on bioethanol E85 (or vice versa) then the engine may run slightly unevenly for a time. For this reason it is impor- tant to allow the engine to accustom itself (adapt) to the new fuel mixture.

Adaptation takes place automatically when the car is driven for a short period at an even speed.

IMPORTANT

After the fuel mixture in the tank has been changed an adaptation should be made by driving at an even speed for about 15 minutes.

If the battery has been discharged or discon- nected then a slightly longer period of driving is required for the adaptation as the memory for the electronics has been cleared.

06 Starting and driving

Keyless drive*

06

150 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

G 01 94 10

The keyless drive system allows the car to be unlocked, driven and locked without the need for a key, see page 122.

The ignition switch ignition dial is used in the same way as the remote control key. One pre- condition for starting the car is that the car's remote control key is located inside the pas- senger compartment or the cargo area.

Starting the car

Depress the clutch pedal (cars with manual gearbox) or brake pedal (cars with auto- matic gearbox).

Petrol engine

Press in and turn the ignition dial to key position III.

Diesel engine

1. First turn the ignition dial to key position II and wait until the diesel indicator symbol in the combined instrument panel goes out, see page 51.

2. Following which, turn the ignition dial to position III.

Starting with the remote control key

G 01 94 20

If the remote control key's battery is dis- charged then the Keyless Drive function does not work. In which case, start the car by using the remote control key as ignition dial.

1. Press in the catch in the ignition dial.

2. Pull the ignition dial out from the ignition switch.

3. Insert the remote control key into the igni- tion switch and start in the same way as with the ignition dial.

06 Starting and driving

Manual gearbox

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 151

Gear positions

Gearshift pattern 5-speed gearbox.

Gearshift pattern 6-speed gearbox.

The 6-speed box is available in two versions - reverse gear position differs between them. Look at the actual gearshift pattern imprinted on the gear lever.

Depress the clutch pedal fully during each gear change.

Take your foot off the clutch pedal between gear changes.

Follow the shifting pattern indicated.

For the best possible fuel economy, use the highest gear possible as often as possible.

Gear shift indicator - GSI*

GSI - Gear Shift Indicator - advises the driver of the opti- mum time to change gear. The indication is given with an arrow for up and down shift- ing respectively in the lower information display of the

combined instrument panel, see page 49.

Reverse gear inhibitor

The reverse gear inhibitor hinders the possibil- ity of mistakenly attempting to engage reverse gear during normal forward travel.

Start from neutral position N and only engage reverse gear R when the car is sta- tionary.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

152

Geartronic automatic gear positions

G 01 82 64

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.

The information display shows the position of the gear selector using the following indica- tions: P, R, N, D, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 or 6, see page 49.

P Parking position

Select position P when you wish to start the engine or park the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must be stationary when position P is selected.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the P position.

The gearbox is mechanically blocked when the P position is engaged. Always apply the parking brake when parking the car.

R Reverse

The car must be stationary when position R is selected.

N Neutral

No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake when the car is stationary with the gear selector in posi- tion N.

NOTE

The brake pedal must be depressed in order to be able to disengage the gear lever from the N position if the car has been stationary for more than 3 seconds.

D Drive

D is the normal driving position. The car auto- matically shifts up and down depending on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when the gear selector is moved to position D from position R.

Geartronic manual gear positions (+/-)

The driver can also change gear manually using the Geartronic automatic gearbox. The car engine-brakes when the accelerator pedal is released.

Manual gearshift mode is obtained by moving the lever to the side from position D to the end position at +/. The information display shifts the indication from D to one of the figures 1 6, which is equivalent to the gear that is engaged just then, see page 49.

Move the lever forwards towards + (plus) to change up a gear and release it, the lever returns to its rest position between + and .

or

Pull the lever back towards (minus) to change down a gear and release it.

The manual gearshift mode (+/) can be selected at any time while driving.

Geartronic automatically shifts down if the driver allows the speed to decrease lower than a level suitable for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling.

To return to automatic driving mode:

Move the lever to the side to the end posi- tion at D.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

153

Kick-down

When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kick- down.

If the accelerator is released from the kick- down position, the gearbox automatically changes up.

Kick-down is used when maximum accelera- tion is needed, such as for overtaking.

Safety function

To prevent overrevving the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor which prevents the kick-down func- tion.

Geartronic does not permit downshifting/kick- down which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed the original gear remains engaged.

When kick-down is activated the car can change one or more gears at a time depending on engine speed. The car changes up when the engine reaches its maximum speed in order to prevent damage to the engine.

Mechanical gear selector inhibitor

G 02 02 37

The gear selector can be moved forward and back freely between N and D. Other positions are locked with a latch that is released with the inhibitor button on the gear selector.

With the inhibitor button depressed the lever can be moved forwards or backwards between P, R, N and D.

Automatic gear selector inhibitor

Cars with an automatic gearbox have special safety systems:

Keylock

To remove the remote control key, the gear selector must be in the P position. The key is locked in all other positions.

Parking position (P)

Stationary car with engine running:

Hold your foot on the brake pedal when moving the gear selector to another posi- tion.

Electric gear inhibitor Shiftlock Parking

position (P position)

To be able to move the gear selector from the P position to other gear positions, the remote control key must be in position II and the brake pedal must be depressed.

Shiftlock Neutral (N position)

If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least three sec- onds (irrespective of whether the engine is run- ning) then the gear selector is locked in the N position.

To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the remote con- trol key must be in position II.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

154 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor

G 01 82 63

In certain cases, it may be necessary to move the car when it is not driveable, for example if the battery is flat. Proceed as follows to move the car:

1. There is a small cover behind P-R-N-D on the gear selector panel. Open it at the rear edge.

2. Fully insert the key blade from the remote control key.

3. Hold the key blade down and at the same time move the gear lever out of the P posi- tion.

Cold start

When starting in low temperatures, the gear changes can sometimes feel hard. This is due to the gearbox oil's viscosity at low tempera- tures. To reduce engine emissions, the gear- box shifts up later than normal when the engine is started at low temperatures.

NOTE

Depending on the engine temperature when the engine is started, the idle speed after a cold start may be higher than normal for certain engine types.

Automatic gearbox, Powershift * 1

G 01 82 64

D: Automatic gear positions. M (+/): Manual gear positions.

Powershift is a six-stage automatic gearbox that has double mechanical clutch discs in contrast to a conventional automatic gearbox. A conventional automatic gearbox has a hydraulic torque converter that transfers power from the engine to the gearbox.

Powershift transmission operates in the same way and has similar controls and functions as the Geartronic automatic transmission, descri- bed in the previous section.

1 Only on the 4-cyl. 2.0 and 2.0D models.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

155

To bear in mind

The transmission's double clutch has overload protection that is activated if it becomes too hot, e.g. if the car is held stationary with the accelerator pedal on an uphill gradient for a long time.

Overheated transmission causes the car to shake and vibrate, and the warning symbol illu- minates and the information display shows a message. The transmission can also overheat during slow driving in queues (10 km/h or slower) on an uphill gradient, or with a trailer hitched. The transmission cools down when the car is stationary, with foot brake depressed and the engine running at idling speed.

Overheating during slow driving in queues can be avoided by driving in stages: Stop the car and wait with your foot on the brake pedal until there is a moderate distance to the traffic ahead, drive forward a short distance, and then wait another moment with your foot on the brake pedal.

IMPORTANT

Use the foot brake to hold the car stationary on an uphill gradient - do not hold the car with the accelerator pedal. The gearbox could then overheat.

Text message and action

In some situations the display can show a mes- sage at the same time as a symbol is illumi- nated.

The table shows three steps with an increased degree of seriousness should the gearbox become too hot. In parallel with the display text the driver is also advised that the car's elec- tronics are temporarily changing the driving characteristics. Follow the instructions on the information display where appropriate.

06 Starting and driving

Automatic gearbox

06

156

Symbol Display Driving characteristics Action

TRANSM. OVERHEAT BRAKE TO

HOLD

Difficulty in maintaining even speed at con- stant engine speed.

Gearbox overheated. Keep the car station- ary using the foot brakeA.

TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY Significant pulling in the car's traction. Gearbox overheated. Park the car immedi- ately in a safe manner.

TRANSM. COOLING LET ENGINE RUN No drive due to overheated gearbox. Gearbox overheated. For fastest cooling: Run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position until the mes- sage clears.

A For fastest cooling: run the engine at idling speed with the gear lever in the N or P position, until the message clears.

NOTE

The table's examples are no indication that the car is defective but instead show that a safety function has been activated inten- tionally to prevent damage to one of the car's components.

WARNING

If a warning symbol combined with the text TRANSM. OVERHEAT PARK SAFELY is ignored then the heat in the gearbox may become so high that the power transmis- sion between engine and gearbox is tem- porarily halted in order to prevent the clutch from malfunctioning - the car then loses drive and is stationary until gearbox tem- perature has cooled to an acceptable level.

For more possible display messages with their respective proposals for solutions concerning automatic transmission, see page 54.

A display text clears automatically after the action has been carried out or after one press on the indicator stalk READ button.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

157

Brake servo

If the car is rolling or is being towed with the engine turned off, the brake pedal must be depressed about 5 times harder than when the engine is running. If the brake pedal is depressed when the engine is started, you will feel the pedal drop. This is normal and due to the brake servo becoming active. This may be more noticeable if the car has Emergency Brake Assistance (EBA).

WARNING

The brake servo only works when the engine is running.

NOTE

If braking with the engine switched off, press the brake pedal sharply once, not repeatedly.

Brake circuits

This symbol illuminates if a brake circuit is not working.

If a fault should occur in one of the circuits, it is still possible to brake

the car. The brake pedal will travel further and may feel softer than normal. Harder pressure on the pedal is needed to produce the normal braking effect.

Dampness can affect braking

characteristics

Brake components become wet when the car is driven in heavy rain, through pools of water or when the car is washed. This may alter brake pad friction characteristics so that there is a delay before braking effect is noticed.

Press the brake pedal lightly from time to time if driving for long stretches in rain or slushy snow, as well as after setting off in very damp or cold weather. This warms up the brake pads and dries off any water. This precaution is also recommended before parking the car for a long period in such weather conditions.

If the brakes are used heavily

When driving in the Alps or other roads with similar characteristics, the car's brakes are heavily loaded even if the brake pedal is not being depressed especially hard.

Because speed is often low, the brakes are not cooled as effectively as when driving on flat roads at higher speed.

So as not to overload the brakes, shift down when driving downhill instead of using the foot brake. Use the same gear driving downhill as you would use driving uphill. This uses engine braking more efficiently so the foot brake is only required for brief periods.

Bear in mind that driving with a trailer puts an additional load on the car's brakes.

Anti-lock braking system - ABS

The anti-lock braking system (ABS) prevents the wheels from locking up during braking.

This means the ability to steer is maintained and it is easier to swerve to avoid a hazard for example.

After the engine has been started, the ABS will perform a brief self-test at a speed of about 20 km/h. This can be felt and heard as pulses in the brake pedal.

To get the most out of the ABS:

1. Depress the brake pedal with full force. Pulses will be felt.

2. Steer the car in the direction of travel. Do not release the pressure on the pedal.

Practice braking with the ABS system in a traf- fic-free area and in different weather condi- tions.

The ABS symbol illuminates for 2 seconds if there was a fault in the ABS system when the engine was last running.

06 Starting and driving

Brake system

06

158

Emergency Brake Assistance EBA

For sudden braking, EBA (Emergency Brake Assist) provides full-strength braking instanta- neously. The EBA function senses when heavy braking is underway by registering how quickly the brake pedal is depressed.

Continue braking without easing off on the brake pedal. The function disengages when the pressure on the brake pedal eases.

This function is always active. It cannot be dis- engaged.

WARNING

If the BRAKE and ABS warning symbols illu- minate at the same time, there may be a fault in the brake system. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an author- ised Volvo workshop is recommended.

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

NOTE

When EBA is activated the brake pedal low- ers slightly more than usual, depress (hold) the brake pedal as long as necessary. If the brake pedal is released then all braking ceases.

Emergency brake lights and automatic

hazard warning flashers

Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about sudden braking. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow.

Emergency brake lights are activated at speeds above 50 km/h if the ABS system is working and/or in the event of sudden braking. After the car's speed has been slowed below 10 km/h the brake light returns from flashing to the normal constant glow - while at the same time the hazard warning flashers are activated, and they flash until the driver changes engine speed with the accelerator pedal or they are deactivated with their button, see page 68.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 159

General

The stability and traction control system, STC/ DSTC (Dynamic Stability and Traction Control) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction.

A pulsing sound may be noticed during braking or acceleration when the system is in action. The car may accelerate slower than expected when the accelerator pedal is depressed.

The car is equipped with either STC or DSTC depending on market. The table shows the integral functions of the respective systems.

Function/system STC DSTC

Active Yaw Control X

Spin Control X X

Traction control sys- tem

X X

Active Yaw Control

The function limits the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car.

Spin Control

The function prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during accel- eration.

Traction control system

The function is active at low speed and trans- fers power from the driving wheel that is spin- ning to the one that is not.

Reduced operation

G 02 90 57

Thumbwheel1

RESETbutton 1

The stability system is activated automatically each time the car is started.

System operation during skidding and accel- eration can be partially deactivated. Operation during skidding is then delayed and so allows more skidding which provides greater freedom for dynamic driving. Traction in deep snow or sand is improved at the same time as acceler- ation is no longer limited.

Operation

1. Turn thumbwheel until the STC/DSTC menu is shown.

DSTC ON means that the system function is unchanged.

DSTC SPIN CONTROL OFF means that system operation is reduced.

2. Press and hold the RESET button until the STC/DSTC menu is changed.

The system remains reduced until the driver reactivates it or until the engine is switched off - after the engine is started the next time DSTC is back in its normal mode again.

1 No function in cars without trip computer, fuel-driven parking heater as well as stability and traction control system.

06 Starting and driving

DSTC Stability and traction control system*

06

160 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

Suppressing system function may alter the driving characteristics of the car.

NOTE

DSTC ON is shown for several seconds on the display each time the engine is started.

Messages on the information display

TRACTION CONTROL TEMPORARILY

OFF means that the system has been tempo- rarily reduced due to excessive brake tempera- ture.

The function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled.

ANTI-SKID SERVICE REQUIRED system disabled due to a fault.

Stop the car in a safe place and turn off the engine. > If the message remains when the engine

is restarted, drive to a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Symbols in the combined instrument panel

STC/DSTC system

Information

If the symbols and are displayed at the same time: Read the message on the informa- tion display.

If the symbol appears alone then it may appear as follows:

Flashing light means that the STC/DSTC system is now being activated.

Constant glow for two seconds means system check when the engine is started.

Constant glow after starting the engine or while driving means that there is a fault in the STC/DSTC system.

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 161

General information on parking assistance

Parking assistance front and rear.

Parking assistance is used as an aid to parking. A signal indicates the distance to a detected obstacle.

WARNING

Parking assistance does not relinquish the driver's own responsibility during parking. The sensors have blind spots where obsta- cles cannot be detected. Be aware of chil- dren or animals near the car.

Variants

Parking assistance is available in two variants:

Rear only.

Both front and rear.

Function

The frequency of the signal increases the shorter the distance to an obstacle, in front of or behind the car. If the volume of another audio source from the audio system is high, then this is automatically lowered.

The tone becomes constant at a distance of about 30 cm. If there are obstacles within this distance both behind and in front of the car, the signal alternates between left and right-hand speakers.

Rear parking assistance only

The system is automatically engaged when the car is started.

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged and the message Park

Assist active, Exit to deactivate is shown on the audio system display.

If the system is switched off, the display shows Park Assist deactivated Enter to activate

as soon as reverse gear is engaged. To change the settings, see page 79.

The distance covered behind the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations

The system must be deactivated when revers- ing with a trailer, or bike carrier on the towbar or similar. Otherwise the trailer or bike carrier would trigger the sensors.

NOTE

Rear parking assistance is deactivated automatically when towing a trailer if a Volvo genuine trailer cable is used.

Parking assistance both front and rear

Button for Off/On (button location depends on other selected equipment).

06 Starting and driving

Park Assist*

06

162 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

The system is automatically engaged when the car is started and the switch's On/Off lamp is illuminated. If parking assistance is switched off with the button, the lamp goes out.

Front

Front parking assistance is active at speeds below 15 km/h. The system is deactivated at higher speeds. When the speed is below 10 km/h the system is reactivated.

The distance covered to the front of the car is about 0.8 metres. The signal for obstacles in front comes from the front loudspeakers.

Limitations

Front parking assistance cannot be combined with extra lights because the sensors are affec- ted by the extra lights.

Rear

Rear parking assistance is activated when reverse gear is engaged.

The distance covered to the rear of the car is about 1.5 metres. The signal for obstacles behind comes from the rear loudspeakers.

Limitations

See the previous section Rear parking assis- tance only.

Fault indicator

If the information symbol illumi- nates with constant glow and the display shows PARK ASSIST

SERVICE REQUIRED then park- ing assistance is disengaged. For

attention, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended.

IMPORTANT

In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning sig- nals that are caused by external sound sources that emit the same ultrasonic fre- quencies that the system works with.

Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc.

Cleaning the sensors

Parking assistance sensors.

The sensors must be cleaned regularly to ensure that they work properly. Clean them with water and car shampoo.

NOTE

Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 163

General

G 02 02 95

Rearview mirror with BLIS system.

BLIS camera

Indicator lamp

BLIS symbol

WARNING

The system is a supplement to, not a replacement for, a safe driving style and use of the rearview mirrors. It can never replace the driver's attention and responsibility. The responsibility for changing lanes safely always rests with the driver.

BLIS is an information system that under cer- tain conditions can help to draw the driver's attention to vehicles moving in the same direc- tion in the so-called "blind spot".

The system is designed to work most effec- tively when driving in dense traffic on multi-lane highways.

BLIS is based on camera technology. The cam- eras (1) are located under the door mirrors.

When a camera has detected a vehicle inside the blind spot zone the indicator lamp (2) illu- minates with a constant glow.

NOTE

The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate.

BLIS advises the driver with a message if a fault arises in the system. If for example the sys- tem's cameras are obscured then the BLIS indicator lamp flashes and a message is shown in the information display. In such cases, check and clean the lenses. If necessary, the system can be switched off temporarily by pressing the BLIS button see page 164.

Blind spots

A = approx. 3.0 m, B = approx. 9.5 m.

When BLIS operates

The system operates when the car is driven at a speed above 10 km/h.

Overtaking

The system is designed to react if you overtake another vehicle at a speed of up to 10 km/h faster than the other vehicle.

The system is designed to react if you are over- taken by a vehicle travelling up to 70 km/h faster than your vehicle.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

164 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

BLIS does not work in sharp bends.

BLIS does not work when the car is revers- ing.

A wide trailer coupled to the car can conceal other vehicles in adjacent lanes. It can pre- vent the vehicle in the screened area from being detected by BLIS.

Daylight and darkness

In daylight the system reacts to the shape of the surrounding vehicles. The system is designed to detect motor vehicles such as cars, trucks, buses and motorcycles.

In darkness the system reacts to the head- lamps of surrounding vehicles. Vehicles with headlamps that are switched off are not detected by the system. This means for exam- ple that the system does not react to a trailer without headlamps which is towed behind a car or truck.

WARNING

The system does not react to cyclists or moped riders.

The BLIS cameras have limitations similar to those of the human eye, i.e. they do not see as well in e.g. heavy snowfall, strong oncoming light or thick fog.

Activating/deactivating

Button for Off/On (button location depends on other selected equipment).

BLIS is activated when the engine is started. The indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times when BLIS is activated.

The system can be deactivated/activated by pressing the BLIS button.

When BLIS is deactivated the light in the button goes out and a text message is shown on the dashboard display.

When BLIS is activated the light in the button illuminates, a new text message is shown on the display and the indicator lamps in the door panels flash three times. Press the READ but-

ton to clear the text message. For more infor- mation on messages, see page 54.

BLIS system message

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS ON The BLIS system is activated.

BLIS REDUCED

FUNCTION

Reduced function in data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system.

The camera resets itself when the data transmission between the BLIS system's camera and the car's electri- cal system returns to normal.

BLIS CAMERA

BLOCKED

One or both cam- eras blocked - clean the lenses.

06 Starting and driving

BLIS* Blind Spot Information System

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 165

Text on the dis- play

Specification

BLIS SERVICE

REQUIRED

Blind spot syst. dis- engaged - contact a workshop.

BLIS OFF The BLIS system is deactivated.

IMPORTANT

Repair of the BLIS system components must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recom- mended.

Cleaning

In order to work most effectively the BLIS cam- era lenses must be clean. The lenses can be cleaned with a soft cloth or damp sponge. Clean the lenses carefully so that they are not scratched.

IMPORTANT

The lenses are electrically heated to melt ice or snow. If necessary, brush snow away from the lenses.

Limitations

In some situations the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot.

NOTE

If the BLIS indicator lamp illuminates on iso- lated occasions despite there being no other vehicle within the blind spot then this does not mean that a fault has arisen in the system.

In the event of a fault in the BLIS system the display shows the text BLIS SERVICE REQUIRED.

Here are several examples of situations where the BLIS indicator lamp may illuminate even if there is no other vehicle within the blind spot.

Reflection from shiny wet road surface.

G 01 81 77

Own shadow on large, light, smooth surface, e.g. noise barrier or concrete road surface.

Low sun in the camera.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

166

Start assistance

Use a donor battery if the battery is discharged and the engine does not start. Do not tow the car to bump start the engine, see page 168.

IMPORTANT

Bump starting the car can damage the cat- alytic converter.

Towing

Find out the highest legal speed for towing before towing the car.

1. Turn the remote control key to position II and unlock the steering lock so that the car can be steered, see page 147.

2. The ignition key must remain in position II while the car is being towed.

3. Ensure the towrope is always taut by gently depressing the brake pedal to avoid violent jerks.

WARNING

The steering lock remains in the position it was in when the power was cut off. The steering lock must be unlocked before tow- ing.

The remote control key must be in position II. Never remove the key from the ignition switch while driving or when the car is being towed.

NOTE

If the car is de-energised then the steering lock must be unlocked using a donor bat- tery before towing can be started.

WARNING

The brake servo and power steering do not work when the engine is switched off. The brake pedal must be pressed about five times harder than normal, and the steering will be considerably heavier than normal.

Manual gearbox

Move gear lever into neutral and release the parking brake.

Automatic gearbox, Geartronic

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

IMPORTANT

Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

Cars with automatic gearbox must not be towed at speeds above 80 km/h or further than 80 km.

Automatic gearbox, Powershift

The 2.0 and 2.0D models with Powershift auto- matic transmission should not be towed as the transmission is dependent on the engine run- ning in order to receive sufficient lubrication.

IMPORTANT

Avoid towing.

However, the car can be towed for a short distance at low speed to move it from a dangerous position - not further than 10 km and not faster than 10 km/h. Note that the car must always be towed with the wheels rolling for- ward.

In the event of moving a longer distance than 10 km, the car must be transported with the drive wheels raised from the road - professional recovery is recom- mended.

06 Starting and driving

Towing and recovery

06

167

Move the gear selector to position N and release the parking brake.

Towing eye

The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the bumper, front or rear.

Fitting the towing eye

Take out the towing eye (1) that is located under the floor hatch in the cargo area.

The cover for the towing eye's attachment point is available in two variants which must be opened in different ways:

Open the variant with a recess using a coin or similar inserted in the recess, turning it outwards. Then turn out the cover completely and remove it.

The second variant has a marking along one side or in a corner: Press the mark- ing with a finger and fold out the oppo- site side/corner at the same time using a coin or similar - the cover turns around its axis and can then be removed.

Screw the towing eye right in up to its flange. Turn in the towing eye firmly e.g. using the wheel wrench.

After use, unscrew the towing eye and return it to its place.

Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper.

IMPORTANT

The towing eye is only designed for towing on roads - not for pulling the car unstuck or out of a ditch. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

NOTE

On certain cars with fitted towbar the towing eye cannot be secured in the rear mounting. In which case, secure the tow rope in the towbar.

For this reason it is advisable to store the towbar's towball in the car, see page 171.

Recovery

Call a recovery service for recovery assistance.

The car must always be towed with the wheels rolling forward.

IMPORTANT

Cars with automatic gearbox must only be towed with drive wheels raised from the road.

06 Starting and driving

Start assistance

06

168

Starting with a donor battery

If the battery in the car has become flat, you can "borrow" electric current from either a sep- arate battery or from another car. Always make sure the crocodile clips on the jump leads are attached securely to eliminate sparks during the start attempt.

When jump starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid risk of explosion:

1. Turn the remote control key to key position 0.

2. Ensure that the other battery is 12 volt.

3. If the donor battery is in another car, switch off the engine in the other car and ensure that the cars do not touch one another.

4. Connect the red jump lead between the positive terminal on the donor battery (1+) and the positive terminal in your car (2+).

5. Connect one end of the black jump lead to the donor battery's negative terminal (3-).

6. Connect the other end of the black jump lead to the earthing point (4) by the left- hand strut tower.

7. Start the engine of the "donor car". Let the engine run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle 1500 rpm.

8. Start the engine of the car with the flat bat- tery.

9. Remove the jump leads, first the black and then the red.

Make sure that none of the clamps on the black jump lead comes into contact with the battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead.

IMPORTANT

Do not touch the crocodile clips during the start procedure. There is a risk of sparks forming.

WARNING

The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode.

The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water.

If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

169

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed information on weights, see page 272.

If the towing bracket is fitted by an authorised Volvo workshop, then the car is delivered with the necessary equipment for driving with a trailer.

The car's towing bracket must be of an approved type.

If the towbar is retrofitted, check with a Volvo dealer that the car is fully equipped for driving with a trailer.

Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towing bracket follows the specified maximum towball load.

Increase the tyre pressure to the recom- mended pressure for a full load. For tyre pressure decal location, see page 186.

Clean the towing bracket regularly and grease the towball1.

The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer.

Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Please wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km.

The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear and adjust your speed.

Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%.

For safety reasons, the maximum permit- ted speed for the car when coupled with a trailer should not be exceeded. Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights.

Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents.

Trailer weights

For information on Volvo's permitted trailer weights, see page 272.

NOTE

The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow.

WARNING

Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking.

Manual gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

Do not run the engine at higher revolutions than 4500 rpm (diesel engines: 3500 rpm) - otherwise the oil temperature may become too high.

Diesel engine 5-cyl

If an engine starts to run too hot, the instru- ment panel will display a text message which recommends switching to a lower gear - follow the recommendation given.

In the event of a risk of overheating the optimal speed for the engine is 2300-3000 rpm for optimum circulation of the coolant.

1 Do not lubricate the towball if using a stabiliser hitch.

06 Starting and driving

Driving with a trailer

06

170

Automatic gearbox

Overheating

When driving with a trailer in hilly terrain in a hot climate there may be a risk of overheating.

An automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear related to load and engine speed.

Steep inclines

Do not lock the automatic transmission in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine revolutions.

IMPORTANT

See also the specific information on slow driving with trailer for cars with the Powershift automatic transmission on page 155.

Parking on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Apply the parking brake.

3. Move the gear selector to parking position P.

4. Release the foot brake.

Move the gear selector to park position P when parking an automatic car with a

hitched trailer. Always use the parking brake.

Block the wheels with chocks when park- ing a car with hitched trailer on a hill.

Starting on a hill

1. Depress the foot brake.

2. Move the gear selector to driving posi- tion D.

3. Release the parking brake.

4. Release the foot brake and start driving off.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 171

Towbar

If the car is equipped with a detachable towbar, the installation instructions for the loose sec- tion must be followed carefully, see page 173.

WARNING

If the car is fitted with a Volvo detachable towbar:

Follow the installation instructions care- fully.

The detachable section must be locked with the key before setting off.

Check that the indicator window shows green.

Important checks

The towbar's towball must be cleaned and greased regularly.

NOTE

If a towball hitch with vibration damper is used, it is not necessary to grease the tow- ball.

Storing the towbar

G 03 11 16

Towbar storage space.

IMPORTANT

Always remove the towbar after use and store it in the appointed location in the car, firmly fastened with its strap.

Trailer cable

G 01 45 89

An adapter is required if the car's towing bracket has 13 pin electrics and the trailer has 7 pin electrics. Use an adapter cable approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground.

06 Starting and driving

Towing equipment*

06

172 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Specifications

G 01 03 93 G 01 03 84

G 01 03 85

Dimensions for mounting points (mm)

A B C D E F G H I J K

Fixed or detachable towbar standard 1070 82 964 482 40 141 497 150 113 100 140

1 Side member

2 Ball centre

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 173

Fitting the towbar

G 01 73 17

1. Remove the protective cover by first press- ing in the catch and then pulling the cover straight back .

G 02 03 01

2. Ensure that the mechanism is in the unlocked position by turning the key clock- wise.

G 02 03 02

3. Check that the indicator window (3) shows red. If the window does not show red, press in and turn the locking wheel anti- clockwise until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

174 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02 03 04

4. Insert the towbar until you hear a click.

G 02 03 06

5. Check that the indicator window shows green.

G 02 03 07

6. Turn the key anticlockwise to locked posi- tion. Remove the key from the lock.

G 02 03 09

7. Check that the towbar is secure by pulling it up, down and back.

WARNING

If the towbar is not fitted correctly then it must be detached and reattached in accordance with the previous instructions.

IMPORTANT

Only grease in the ball for the towing hitch, the remainder of the towbar should be clean and dry.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 175

G 02 03 10

8. Safety cable.

WARNING

Be sure to attach the trailer's safety cable to the correct place.

Removing the towbar

G 02 03 01

1. Insert the key and turn it clockwise to the unlocked position.

G 02 03 12

2. Push in the locking wheel and turn it anticlockwise until you hear a click.

06 Starting and driving

Detachable towbar*

06

176 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02 03 14

3. Turn the locking wheel down fully, until it comes to a stop. Hold it in this position while pulling the towbar rearward and upward.

WARNING

Secure the towbar safely if it is stored in the car, see page 171.

G 01 73 18

4. Push on the protective cover.

06 Starting and driving

Loading

06

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 177

General

Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. For more detailed infor- mation on weights, see page 272.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

Loading the cargo area

Stop the engine and apply the parking brake when loading or unloading long objects. The gear lever or gear selector can be knocked out of position by long loads, which could set the car in motion.

To increase the size of the cargo area, the head restraints can be removed and the seats folded down, see page 110.

Place the load firmly against the backrest in front.

The head rests can be removed so that they are not damaged.

Put wide loads in the centre.

Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on a lowered backrest.

Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery.

Secure all loads to the load retaining eye- lets with straps or web lashings.

WARNING

A loose object weighing 20 kg can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h, carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg.

WARNING

Never load cargo above the backrest.

The protection provided by the inflatable curtain in the headlining may be compro- mised or eliminated by high loads.

Always secure the load. During heavy brak- ing the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants.

Load carriers*

To avoid damaging the car and for maximum possible safety while driving, it is recom- mended to use load carriers specially designed for your car by Volvo.

Carefully follow the mounting instructions sup- plied with the carriers.

Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps.

Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom.

The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the load's size.

Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering.

WARNING

The car's centre of gravity and driving cha- racteristics are altered by roof loads.

06 Starting and driving

Adjusting headlamp pattern

06

178

Correct light pattern for left or right- hand traffic

G 02 03 17

Headlamp pattern for left-hand traffic.

Headlamp pattern for right-hand traffic.

The headlamp pattern can be adjusted using a control in each headlamp housing to avoid dazzling oncoming motorists.

The correct pattern will also better illuminate the verge.

Halogen headlamps

G 02 14 21

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

Headlamps with Active Bending Lights

G 02 14 22

Left-hand traffic.

Right-hand traffic.

WARNING

On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head- lamp replacement must be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The lamp must be han- dled with extreme caution because it is equipped with a high voltage unit.

06 Starting and driving

06

179

180 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 182 Tyre pressure........................................................................................ 186 Warning triangle* and spare wheel * .................................................... 189 Changing wheels................................................................................... 192 Emergency puncture repair* ................................................................ 194

WHEELS AND TYRES

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

182

Driving characteristics and tyres

The tyres greatly affect the car's driving cha- racteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs.

When changing tyres, ensure that tyres of the same type and dimensions, and preferably also the same make, are fitted to all four wheels. Follow the recommended tyre pressures specified on the tyre pressure label, see page 186.

Designation of dimensions

The dimensions are stated on all car tyres. Example: 205/55R16 91 W.

205 Tyre width (mm)

55 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%)

R Radial ply

16 Rim diameter in inches (")

91 Tyre load index (in this case 615 kg)

W Speed rating for maximum permitted speed (in this case 270 km/h).

Speed ratings

The car is approved as a whole, which means that dimensions and speed ratings must not differ from those specified on the vehicle reg- istration document. The only exception to these conditions is winter tyres (both those with metal studs and those without). If such a tyre is chosen, the car must not be driven faster than the speed rating of the tyre (for example, class Q can be driven at a maximum of 160 km/h).

Remember that traffic regulations determine how fast a car can be driven, not the speed class of the tyres.

Note! Maximum permitted speeds indicated.

Q 160 km/h (used only on winter tyres)

T 190 km/h

H 210 km/h

V 240 km/h

W 270 km/h

Y 300 km/h

New tyres

Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is espe- cially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 1510. The tyre in the illustration was manufac- tured in week 15 of 2010.

Tyre age

All tyres older than six years should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged.

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

183

The reason for this is that tyres age and decom- pose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected due to the tyre's constituent materials being broken down. In such a case the tyre should then not be used. This also applies to spare tyres, winter tyres and tyres saved for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discoloration.

The age of the tyre can be determined by the DOT marking, see previous illustration.

More even wear and maintenance

The correct tyre pressure results in more even wear, see page 186. Driving style, tyre pres- sure, climate and road condition affect how quickly your tyres age and wear. To avoid dif- ferences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns arising, the front and rear wheels can be switched with each other. A suitable dis- tance for the first change is approx. 5000 km and then at 10 000 km intervals. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (>1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, the least worn tyres must always be placed on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing for-

wards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in pos- sible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels.

Wheels should be stored lying down or hanging up, and not standing up.

Tyres with tread wear indicators

G 02 03 23

Tread wear indicators.

Tread wear indicators are narrow treadless bands across the width of the tread. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm, the tread depth will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that

tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow.

Winter tyres

Volvo recommends winter tyres with specific winter tyre dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, they must be fitted to all four wheels.

NOTE

Volvo recommends that you consult a Volvo dealer about which wheel rim and tyre types are most suitable.

Studded tyres

Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km, so that the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and espe- cially the studs, a longer service life.

NOTE

The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country.

Tread depth

Road conditions with ice, slush and low tem- peratures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. It is therefore

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

184

recommended not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm.

Snow chains

Snow chains may only be used on the front wheels. This also applies to all-wheel-drive cars.

Never drive faster than 50 km/h with snow chains. Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres.

WARNING

Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equiva- lent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. In the event of uncertainty Volvo recommends that you consult an authorised Volvo workshop. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to your car and lead to an accident.

Rims and wheel nuts

Only use wheel rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are included in the Volvo genuine accessories range.

Standard wheel nuts.

Bulge acorn wheel nut with fixed washer.

There are two types of wheel nut, depending on whether the wheel rims are made of steel or aluminium.

1. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (1) to 110 Nm. Tighten the wheel nuts of model (2) to 130 Nm.

2. Check the torque with a torque wrench.

IMPORTANT

The wheel nuts (1) should be tightened to 110 Nm and (2) to 130 Nm respectively. Overtightening can damage the nuts and the bolts.

Steel rims standard wheel nuts (1)

Steel rims are normally mounted with the standard wheel nuts, but the bulge acorn vari- ety may also be used.

WARNING

Never use standard nuts for aluminium rims. The wheel could come loose.

Aluminium rims bulge acorn wheel nuts

(2)

Only use the bulge acorn variety of nuts with aluminium rims. These differ markedly from other nut types as they have a rotating conical washer.

NOTE

These nuts may also be used with steel rims.

Locking wheel nuts

Locking wheel nuts can be used on both alu- minium and steel rims. If steel rims with locking

07 Wheels and tyres

General

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 185

wheel nuts are used in combination with wheel covers, the locking wheel nut should be moun- ted on the bolt nearest the air valve. Otherwise the wheel cover cannot be fitted to the rim.

NOTE

Tighten the lockable wheel nuts to 110 Nm.

Spare wheel Temporary Spare*

The spare wheel (Temporary spare) is only intended for use temporarily and must be replaced by an ordinary wheel as soon as pos- sible. The car's handling may be altered by the use of the spare wheel. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel. The car's ground clearance is affected accordingly. Pay attention to high kerbs and do not machine wash the car. If the spare wheel is fitted on the front axle, you cannot use snow chains at the same time. On all-wheel drive cars the drive on the rear axle can be disconnected. The spare wheel must not be repaired. The correct tyre pressure for the spare wheel is stated in the tyre pressure table, see page 186.

IMPORTANT

Never drive faster than 80 km/h with a spare wheel on the car.

IMPORTANT

The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel.

Summer and winter wheels

G 02 03 25

The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation.

When summer and winter wheels are changed, see page 192, the wheels should be marked with which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rota- tion marked with an arrow.

The tyre must always rotate in the same direc- tion throughout its lifespan. Tyres should only

be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa.

If the tyre is mounted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain, snow and slush out of the way are adversely affected.

Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding).

Volvo recommends that you contact an author- ised Volvo workshop for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

186

Recommended tyre pressure

G 02 07 91

The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar shows which pressures the tyres should have at different load and speed conditions.

Tyre pressure for the car's recommended tyre size

ECO pressure1

Spare tyre pressure (Temporary Spare).

Checking the tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

NOTE

Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature.

Even after several kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. So air must not be released if the pressure is checked when the tyres are warm. While the pressure must be increased if it is too low.

Inadequately inflated tyres increase fuel con- sumption, shorten tyre lifespan and impair the car's roadholding. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low can also result in the tyres overheating and disintegrating.

For information on the correct tyre pressure, refer to the tyre pressure table. The specified tyre pressures refer to "cold tyres". ("Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same tempera- ture as the ambient temperature.)

Fuel economy, ECO pressure

At speeds under 160 km/h the general tyre pressure for maximum load is recommended in order to obtain optimum fuel economy.

Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and steering characteristics.

1 ECO pressure results in improved fuel economy.

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

187

Tyre pressure table

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load

Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa)

Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

1.6

2.0F

2.0

D2

195/65 R15

205/55 R16

0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18C

0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

2.4

2.4i

205/55 R16 0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 250 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 260 220 280 260 -

T5

T5 AWDD

205/55 R16 0160 210 210 250 250 250

160+ 260 210 280 260 -

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0160 220 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

07 Wheels and tyres

Tyre pressure

07

188

Variant Tyre size Speed (km/h)

Load, 1 - 3 persons Max. load Max. load

Front (kPa) A Rear (kPa)

Front (kPa) Rear (kPa) ECO pressureB

D3

D4

205/55 R16

205/50 R17

215/45 R18

0160 230 220 250 250 250

160+ 270 220 290 270 -

Temporary Spare Tyre 080 420 420 420 420 -

A In certain countries there is the "bar" unit beside the SI unit "Pascal": 1 bar = 100 kPa. B Fuel-efficient driving, see page 186. C 1.6 cannot select this tyre. D Certain markets.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 189

Warning triangle

G 02 09 04

Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle*. Place the warning triangle in a suita- ble place with regard to the traffic.

1. Undo the case containing the warning tri- angle, it is secured with Velcro straps. Take the warning triangle from the case.

2. Lower the warning triangle's support legs.

Ensure the warning triangle and its case are properly secured in the cargo area after use.

G 02 09 14

The warning triangle is fitted on the inside of the boot lid with two clips.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07

190 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Spare wheel* and jack *

G 00

00 00

The car's original jack*

The original jack must only be used for chang- ing wheels. The jack's thread should always be well greased. The spare wheel* plus jack* and wheel wrench* are stored under the floor in the cargo area.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

Taking out the spare wheel

1. Fold the rear edge of the floor mat forward.

2. Release the spare wheel and lift it out.

3. Take out the jack and the wheel wrench.

Putting the spare wheel* and jack* into

the cargo area

1. Crank the jack (3) to halfway in order that the jack shall fit horizontally in the bracket.

2. Fold in the handle (6) and place the wheel wrench (2) on the jack.

3. Put the jack (3) back in the hole on the right (4). Fasten the spare wheel (1) in the hole on the left (5).

Tools - returning into place

Tools and jack* must be returned into place in the correct manner after use.

For cars equipped with spare wheel, the jack must be cranked so that it fits into the spare wheel.

For cars equipped with emergency punc- ture repair kit, the jack must be fully cranked together and returned into the foam block.

07 Wheels and tyres

Warning triangle* and spare wheel *

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 191

IMPORTANT

The tools and jack* must be stored in the intended location in the car's cargo area when not in use.

First aid*

A case with first aid equipment is located in the cargo area.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

192 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Removing wheels

G 02 03 31

Set up the warning triangle if a wheel must be changed at a busy location. Make sure that the car and jack are on a firm horizontal surface.

WARNING

Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt.

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack* that belongs to the car model in question, which is indicated on the jack's label.

The label also indicates the jack's maximum lift capacity at a specified minimum lifting height.

1. Take out the spare wheel*, jack* and wheel wrench* that are located under the carpet in the cargo area. If another jack is selected, see page 209.

G 02 03 32

2. Apply the parking brake and engage reverse gear, or position P if the car has an automatic gearbox.

3. Place chocks in front of and behind the wheels which will remain on the ground. Use heavy wooden blocks or large stones.

4. Cars with steel rims have removable wheel covers. Prize off the wheel cover with the end of the wheel wrench, or pull it off by hand.

5. Loosen the wheel nuts -1 turn anticlock- wise with the wheel wrench.

WARNING

Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point.

07 Wheels and tyres

Changing wheels

07

193

6. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess in the plastic cover at each point. Crank the foot of the jack down so it is pressed squarely on the ground. Check that the jack is seated cor- rectly in the intended jacking point, as illus- trated, and that the base is located directly under it.

IMPORTANT

The ground must be firm, smooth and level.

7. Lift the car so that the wheel is free. Remove the wheel nuts and lift off the wheel.

Fitting the wheel

1. Clean the contact surfaces between wheel and hub.

2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel nuts.

3. Lower the car so that the wheel cannot rotate.

4. Tighten the wheel nuts crosswise. It is important that the wheel nuts are tightened properly. Tighten to 110 Nm.

Standard wheel nuts and domed wheel nuts with rotating washers (tightening tor- que: 110 Nm).

Domed wheel nuts with fixed washers (tightening torque: 130 Nm).

Check the torque with a torque wrench.

5. Put on the wheel cover (steel rim).

WARNING

Never crawl under the car when it is raised on the jack.

Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack.

Ensure that passengers wait with the car - or preferably a crash barrier - between them and the road.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

194 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Emergency puncture repair, general information

The emergency puncture repair kit is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the tyre pressure. It consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The kit works as a temporary repair. The sealing fluid bottle must be replaced before its expiration date and after use.

The sealing fluid effectively seals tyres punc- tured in the tread.

NOTE

The emergency puncture repair kit is only intended for sealing tyres with a puncture in the tread.

The emergency puncture repair kit has limited capacity to seal tyres which have punctures in the wall. Do not seal tyres with the emergency puncture repair kit if they have larger slits, cracks or similar damage.

12V sockets for the compressor are located by the centre console in the front, by the rear seat and in the cargo area*. Choose the electrical socket that is nearest the punctured tyre.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Taking out the emergency puncture

repair kit

The emergency puncture repair kit with com- pressor and tools are found under the floor in the cargo area.

1. Fold up the cargo area floor.

2. Lift up the emergency puncture repair kit.

Overview

G 02 04 00

Decal, maximum permitted speed

Switch

Cable

Bottle holder (orange cap)

Protective cap

Pressure reducing valve

Air hose

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 195

Sealing fluid bottle

Pressure gauge

Sealing punctured tyres

G 01 97 23

For information on the function of the parts, see preceding illustration.

1. Open the lid of the emergency puncture repair kit.

2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed and affix it to the steering wheel.

WARNING

The sealing fluid can irritate the skin. In the case of contact with skin, wash away the fluid with soap and water.

3. Check that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and the air hose.

NOTE

Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in.

4. Unscrew the orange cap and unscrew the bottle's stopper.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Screw the bottle into its holder.

6. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

7. Plug the cable into the 12 V socket and start the car.

WARNING

Never stand next to the tyre when the com- pressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

NOTE

When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds.

8. Flick the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

9. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

196 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

WARNING

If the pressure is below 1.8 bar then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Contacting an authorised tyre centre is recommended.

10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar and maximum is 3.5 bar.

11. Switch off the compressor and unplug the cable from the 12 V socket.

12. Detach the hose from the tyre valve and fit the valve cap.

13. As soon as possible, drive approximately 3 km at a maximum speed of 80 km/h so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre.

Rechecking the repair and pressure

1. Reconnect the equipment.

2. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge.

3. If it is below 1.3 bar then the tyre is insuf- ficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Contact a tyre centre.

4. If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar, the tyre must be inflated to the pressure

specified on the tyre pressure decal. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high.

WARNING

Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage.

5. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable. Refit the dust cap.

NOTE

The sealing fluid bottle and the hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that this replacement is performed by an authorised Volvo workshop.

WARNING

Check the tyre pressure regularly.

6. Return the emergency puncture repair kit to the cargo area.

7. Volvo recommends that you drive to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid.

WARNING

You should not drive faster than 80 km/h after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for inspection of the sealed tyre (maximum driving distance is 200 km). The staff there can determine whether or not the tyre can be repaired or if it needs to be replaced.

Inflating the tyres

The car's original tyres can be inflated by the compressor.

1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 and locate the cable and air hose.

2. Unscrew the wheel's dust cap and screw in the air hose valve connection to the bot- tom of the thread on the tyre's air valve.

WARNING

Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine run- ning in sealed areas or areas that lack suf- ficient ventilation.

07 Wheels and tyres

Emergency puncture repair*

07

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 197

WARNING

Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running.

3. Connect the cable to one of the car's 12 V sockets and start the car.

4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I.

IMPORTANT

Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes.

5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure decal. (Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pres- sure is too high.)

6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and cable.

7. Refit the dust cap.

Changing the sealing fluid canister

Replace the bottle before the expiration date has passed. Treat the old bottle as environ- mentally hazardous waste.

WARNING

The bottle contains 1.2-Ethanol and natural rubber-latex.

Harmful if ingested. Could result in allergic reaction in the event of skin contact.

Avoid contact with the skin and eyes.

Store out of the reach of children.

NOTE

Leave the container at a collection point for storing dangerous waste.

198

Cleaning................................................................................................ 200 Touching up paintwork ........................................................................ 204 Rustproofing......................................................................................... 205

CAR CARE

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

200

Washing the car

Wash the car as soon as it becomes dirty. Use car shampoo. Dirt and road salt can lead to corrosion.

Do not park the car in direct sunlight. Washing a car with hot paintwork can cause permanent paintwork damage. Wash the car in a car wash with waste water separator.

Hose down the underbody thoroughly.

Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water.

If the dirt is difficult to dislodge, wash the car using a cold degreasing agent.

Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper.

WARNING

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

IMPORTANT

Dirty headlamps have impaired functional- ity. Clean them regularly, when refuelling for example.

NOTE

Outside lighting such as headlamps, fog lamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is a natural phenomenon, all outside lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp when it has been switched on for a time.

Cleaning the wiper blades

Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades.

NOTE

Wash the wiper blades and windscreen reg- ularly with lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo.

Do not use any strong solvents.

Removing bird droppings

Wash away bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. Bird droppings contain chemicals that affect and discolour paintwork very quickly. This discoloration can only be removed by a specialist.

Chromed wheels

IMPORTANT

Rim cleaning agents can cause stains on chrome-plated wheels. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of luke- warm water.

Automatic car washes

An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it can never replace a proper handwashing. The brushes of an auto- matic car wash cannot reach everywhere.

IMPORTANT

Washing by hand is gentler to the paintwork than an automatic car wash. Paintwork is also more sensitive when it is new. For this reason, handwashing is recommended dur- ing the first few months with a new car.

High-pressure washing

When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm to the surface of the car (the distance applies to all exterior parts).

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 201

IMPORTANT

Rinse the entire car to remove loose dirt. When using a pressure washer: Make sure that the nozzle of the pressure washer is not closer than 30 cm to the bodywork. Do not spray directly onto the locks.

Testing the brakes

WARNING

Always test the brakes after washing the car, including the parking brake, to ensure that moisture and corrosion do not attack the brake linings and reduce braking per- formance.

Lightly depress the brake pedal now and then when driving long distances in rain or slush. This heats and dries the brake pads. Do the same thing after starting in very damp or cold weather.

Exterior plastic, rubber and trim

components

A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components (such as glossy trim mouldings). When using such a cleaning agent the instruc- tions must be followed carefully.

IMPORTANT

Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber.

When using degreasant on plastic and rub- ber, only rub with light pressure if it is nec- essary. Use a soft washing sponge.

Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface.

Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used.

Polishing and waxing

Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection.

The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed before this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight.

Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork.

Polish first with a polish and then wax with liq- uid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations con- tain both polish and wax.

IMPORTANT

Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paint- work. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo war- ranty.

Water-repellent coating*

Never use products such as car wax, degreaser or similar on glass surfa-

ces as this could ruin their water-repellent properties.

Take care when cleaning so as not to damage the glass surface.

To avoid damaging glass surfaces when removing ice only use plastic ice scrapers.

There is natural wear of the water-repellent coating.

NOTE

Treatment with a special finishing agent available from Volvo dealers is recom- mended in order to maintain the water- repellent properties. This should be used first after three years and then each year.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

202

Cleaning the interior

Treatment of stains on textile upholstery

and headliner

Only use cleaning agents and car care prod- ucts recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and follow the instructions included with the car care product. Other chemicals can impair the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery.

Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents.

Volvo's cleaning agents can also be used for stains on the mat after vacuuming.

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery.

A special fabric cleaning agent, available from authorised Volvo dealers, is recommended to avoid impairing the fire retardant qualities of the upholstery. Use water and a synthetic detergent to clean the seatbelts. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

Treating stains on leather upholstery

Volvo's leather upholstery is chromium-free and approved in accordance with the Oeko- Tex 100 standard and is treated to preserve its original appearance.

Leather upholstery ages and acquires a beau- tiful patina over time. The leather is refined and processed so that it retains its natural charac- teristics. It is given a protective coating, but regular cleaning is required in order to maintain both characteristics and appearance. Volvo offers a comprehensive product for the clean- ing and treatment of leather upholstery which, when used in accordance with the instructions, preserves the leather's protective coating. After a period of use the natural appearance of the leather will nevertheless emerge, depend- ing more or less on the surface texture of the leather. This is a natural maturing of the leather and shows that it is a natural product.

To achieve best results Volvo recommends cleaning and the application of protective cream once to four times per year (or more if necessary). The Volvo Leather Care kit is avail- able from your Volvo dealer.

IMPORTANT

Certain items of coloured clothing (for example, jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery.

Never use strong solvents. Such prod- ucts may damage fabric, vinyl and leather upholstery.

Washing instructions for leather

upholstery

1. Pour the leather cleaner on the dampened sponge and squeeze out a strong foam.

2. Work the dirt away with gentle circular movements.

3. Dab accurately with the sponge on the stains. Allow the sponge to absorb the stain. Do not rub.

4. Wipe off with soft paper or a cloth and allow the leather to dry completely.

Protective treatment of leather

upholstery

Vacuuming is important prior to using leather care agents.

1. Pour a small amount of the protective cream on the felted cloth and massage in a thin layer of cream with gentle circular movements on the leather.

2. Allow the leather to dry for 20 minutes before use.

The leather has now been given improved pro- tection against stains and improved UV pro- tection.

08 Car care

Cleaning

08

203

IMPORTANT

Sharp objects may damage the leather, (e.g. rings).

Washing instructions for the leather

steering wheel

Remove dirt and dust with a soft pre-mois- tened sponge and neutral soap.

Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plas- tic.

Use natural oils. Volvo's leather care agents are recommended for best results.

If the steering wheel has stains:

Group 1 (ink, wine, coffee, milk, sweat and blood)

Use a soft cloth or sponge. Mix a 5% ammonia solution. (For blood stains, use a solution of 2 dl water and 25g salt.)

Group 2 (fats, oils, sauces and chocolate)

1. Same procedure as group I.

2. Polish with an absorbent paper or cloth.

Group 3 (dry dirt, dust)

1. Use a soft brush to remove the dirt.

2. Same procedure as group I.

Treating stains on interior plastic, metal

and wood parts

A special cleaning agent, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers.

Cleaning seatbelts

Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from your Volvo dealer. Make sure the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract.

08 Car care

Touching up paintwork

08

204

Paintwork

Paint is an important part of the car's rust- proofing and should therefore be checked reg- ularly. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings and doors.

Colour code

Data plate.

Code for car colour

It is important that the correct colour is used. For product decal location, see page 270.

Stone chips and scratches

G 02 03 45

Before touching up paintwork, the car must be clean and dry and at a temperature above 15 C.

Materials

Primer in a can

Spray can or touch-up pen1

Masking tape.

Minor stone chips and scratches

If the stone chip has not penetrated to the bare metal and there is an undamaged colour coat, you can paint straight after cleaning the dam- aged area.

If the stone chip has penetrated to the

bare metal

1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint.

2. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush or a matchstick. Apply paint using a brush once the primer is dry.

3. For scratches, proceed as above, but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork.

4. After a few days, polish the touched-up areas. Use a soft rag and a small amount of lapping paste.

1 Follow the instructions contained in the touch-up pen's packaging.

08 Car care

Rustproofing

08

205

Inspection and maintenance

Your car has already received a thorough and complete rustproofing at the factory. Parts of the body are made of galvanised sheet metal. The underbody is protected by a wear-resis- tant anti-corrosion compound. A thin, pene- trating rustproofing fluid was sprayed into the members, cavities and closed sections.

Maintain the car's rustproofing.

Keep the car clean. Hose down the under- body. If using a pressure washer, keep the nozzle at least 30 cm from the painted sur- faces.

Regularly check and touch-up the rust- proofing treatment as necessary.

The car's rustproofing does not normally require treatment for approximately 12 years. After this period, it should be treated at three- year intervals. If the car needs further treat- ment, Volvo recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop for assistance.

206

Volvo service......................................................................................... 208 Self-maintenance.................................................................................. 209 Bonnet and engine compartment......................................................... 210 Oils and fluids....................................................................................... 212 Wiper blades......................................................................................... 217 Battery................................................................................................... 218 Replacing bulbs ................................................................................... 220 Fuses..................................................................................................... 226

MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE

09 Maintenance and service

Volvo service 09

208

Volvo service programme

Before the car left the factory, it was thoroughly test driven. It was checked again in accord- ance with Volvo Car Corporation regulations before it was handed over to you.

To keep your Volvo as safe and reliable as pos- sible, follow the Volvo service programme specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo also recommends that you engage an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo work- shops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest qual- ity of service.

IMPORTANT

For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet.

Special service measures

Certain service measures which affect the car's electrical system can only be performed using electronic equipment specially developed for your car. For this reason, Volvo recommends that you always contact an authorised Volvo workshop before beginning or performing service work that affects the electrical system.

09 Maintenance and service

Self-maintenance 09

209

Before starting work on the car

Battery

Check that the battery cables are correctly connected and tightened.

Never disconnect the battery when the engine is running (e.g. if replacing the battery).

Never use a quick charger to charge the bat- tery. The battery cables must be disconnected when charging the battery.

The battery contains acid that is both corrosive and toxic. It is therefore important to handle the battery in an environmentally correct manner. Let your Volvo dealer assist you.

WARNING

High output from the ignition system. The voltage in the ignition system is highly dan- gerous. The ignition must therefore always be switched off for work in the engine com- partment.

Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coils when the ignition is on or the engine is hot.

Raising the car

NOTE

Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack other than one recommended by Volvo is selected, then follow the instructions included with the equipment

If the car is raised with a workshop jack; posi- tion the jack against the front edge on the sub- frame.

Do not damage the splashguard under the engine. Ensure that the jack is positioned so that the car cannot slide off the jack. Always use axle stands or similar.

If you raise the car using a two-pillar workshop lift, ensure that the front and rear lift arms are fixed under the lifting points on the door sill. See preceding illustration.

Check regularly

Check the following at regular intervals, for example, when refuelling:

Coolant The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank.

Engine oil The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Power steering fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

Washer fluid The reservoir should be well filled. Use washer antifreeze at tempera- tures around freezing.

Brake and clutch fluid The level must be between the MIN and MAX marks.

WARNING

Bear in mind that the radiator fan may start automatically some time after the engine has been switched off.

Always have the engine cleaned by a work- shop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot.

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

210

Opening the bonnet

G 02 07 93

The illustration shows a left-hand drive car.

1. Pull the handle on the far left under the instrument panel. (In right-hand drive cars the handle is on the far right.) You will hear when the catch releases.

2. Insert your hand under the centre of the front edge of the bonnet and press the safety catch to the right.

3. Open the bonnet.

WARNING

Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed.

Engine compartment

Washer fluid reservoir (4-cyl.)

Coolant expansion tank

Reservoir for the power steering fluid (con- cealed behind the headlamp)

Engine oil dipstick1

Radiator

Radiator fan

Washer fluid reservoir (5-cyl.)

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (right-hand drive)

Filler opening for engine oil1

Brake and clutch fluid reservoir (left-hand drive)

1 The location varies depending on engine alternative

09 Maintenance and service

Bonnet and engine compartment 09

211

Battery

Relay and fuse box, engine compartment

Air filter1

1 The location varies depending on engine alternative

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

212

Engine compartment decal for oil grade

IMPORTANT

Always use oil of the prescribed grade, see the engine compartment decal. Check the oil level frequently and change the oil regu- larly. The engine will be damaged if lower grade oil is used or if the car is driven with the oil level too low.

Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse con- ditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than that specified on the decal, see page 277.

Checking the engine oil and oil filter

G 02 03 38

Dipstick, petrol engines.

G 02 03 40

Dipstick, diesel engines. (D5 has an electronic dip- stick.)

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

Change the oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and War- ranty Booklet.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

213

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil (see the engine compartment decal) for both filling and oil change, other- wise you will risk affecting service life, star- ting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Volvo uses different systems for warning of low oil level or low oil pressure. Certain variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the lamp for oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, and then the driver is informed via the warning symbol in the centre of the instrument unit as well as by display texts. Cer- tain models have both variants. Volvo recom- mends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer for further information.

Checking the oil level in a new car is especially important before the first scheduled oil change. The Service and Warranty Booklet specifies the odometer readings for oil changes.

Volvo recommends checking the oil level every 2 500 km. The most accurate measurements are made on a cold engine before starting. The measurement will be inaccurate if taken imme- diately after the engine is switched off. The dipstick will indicate that the level is too low because the oil has not had time to flow down into the oil sump.

Checking the oil

G 02 03 36

The oil level must be within the area marked on the dipstick.

Checking the oil in a cold engine

1. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking the level.

2. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

3. If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on the dipstick, see page 277 for capacities.

Checking the oil in a warm engine

1. Park the car on a level surface, switch off the engine and then wait 10-15 minutes to allow the oil time to run back to the sump.

2. Wipe the dipstick clean before checking the level.

3. Check the oil level using the dipstick. The level must be between the MIN and MAX

marks.

If the level is close to the MIN mark, start by topping up with 0.5 litres. Top up until the oil level is nearer the MAX than the MIN mark on the dipstick, see page 277 for capacities.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

214

WARNING

Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire.

IMPORTANT

Never fill above the MAX mark. Oil con- sumption may increase if too much oil is poured into the engine.

For engines with electronic dipstick1

The oil level is checked using the electronic oil level gauge with the thumbwheel when the engine is switched off, see page 61.

Checking the oil level:

1. Switch the ignition to key position II, see page 146.

2. Turn the thumbwheel to position "ENGINE

OIL LEVEL". > The oil level in the engine is then shown.

NOTE

The oil level is only updated by the system during driving. The system cannot detect changes when oil is filled or drained.

If engine oil is filled or drained then the car must be driven about 30 km before the oil level is measured correctly.

Message

Engine oil level OK All normal.

Engine oil level

Wait...

System initialised, shown for about 2 seconds.

Engine oil level Fill

1 litre oil

Fill with engine oil

Engine oil level

Service required

Shown when the system has detected something that needs to be rec- tified in order to ena- ble the correct infor- mation regarding oil volume to be shown.

Washer fluid, topping up

G 02 03 35

Location of washer fluid reservoir2.

The windscreen and headlamp washers share a common reservoir.

For capacities, see the table Fluidson page 279.

Filler cap on 4-cylinder engines and diesel.

Filler cap on 5-cylinder engines.

Add washer antifreeze during the winter so that the fluid does not freeze in the pump, reservoir and hoses.

1 Only applies to diesel (D5). 2 Depending on engine alternative.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

215

NOTE

Mix the washer antifreeze and water before filling the reservoir.

TIP! Clean the wiper blades when topping up washer fluid.

Checking and topping up the coolant

G 02 03 34

When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. It is important that the mixture of coolant concentrate and water is correct for the prevailing weather con- ditions. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate.

IMPORTANT

A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system.

Always use coolant with anti-corrosion agent as recommended by Volvo.

Ensure that the coolant mixture is 50% water and 50% coolant.

Mix the coolant with approved quality tap water. In the event of any doubt about water quality, used ready-mixed coolant in accordance with Volvo rec- ommendations.

When changing coolant/replacing cool- ing system components, flush the cool- ing system clean with approved quality tap water or flush with ready-mixed coolant.

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High tempera- tures may occur, causing a risk of dam- age (cracks) to the cylinder head.

For capacities and for standards regarding water quality, see page 279.

Check the coolant regularly

The level must lie between the MIN and MAX

marks on the expansion tank. If the system is

not filled sufficiently, high local temperatures could occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head. Top up the coolant when the level falls to the MIN mark.

WARNING

Coolant can be very hot. If the coolant requires topping up when the engine is at operating temperature, unscrew the expan- sion tank cap slowly to gently release the overpressure.

NOTE

The engine must only be run with a well- filled cooling system. High temperatures can occur, causing a risk of damage (cracks) to the cylinder head.

09 Maintenance and service

Oils and fluids 09

216

Checking and topping up the brake and clutch fluid

G 02 03 33

Brake and clutch fluid have a common reser- voir3. The fluid level must be between the MIN and MAX marks. Check the level regularly. Change the brake fluid every other year or at every other regular service.

For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see the table Fluids on page 279.

The fluid should be changed annually on cars driven in conditions requiring hard, frequent braking, such as driving in mountains or tropi- cal climates with high humidity.

WARNING

If the brake fluid is under the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid.

The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated.

Checking and topping up the power steering fluid

NOTE

Check the level frequently.

The fluid does not require changing. For capacities and recommended fluid grade, see page 277.

If a fault should arise in the power steering sys- tem or if the car is without power and must be towed, it can still be steered. However, the steering will be much heavier than normal and it will require more effort to turn the steering wheel.

3 Location dependent on whether car is left or right-hand drive.

09 Maintenance and service

Wiper blades 09

217

Wiper blades

G 02 03 30

NOTE

The wiper blades are different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the other side.

Cleaning

For cleaning wiper blades and windscreen, see page 200.

IMPORTANT

Check the wiper blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the serv- ice life of the wiper blades.

Replacing the wiper blades, windscreen

G 02 03 29

1. Turn up the wiper arm.

2. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out (1), parallel with the wiper arm.

3. Slide in (2) the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. > Check (3) that the blade is firmly instal-

led and fold down the wiper arm.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

218

Battery care

The service life and function of the battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving con- ditions and climatic conditions.

NOTE

An expended battery must be recycled in an environmentally correct manner as it con- tains lead.

WARNING

Batteries can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. One spark, which can be generated if you connect the jump leads incorrectly, is sufficient to make the battery explode. The battery contains sul- phuric acid, which can cause serious burns. If the acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes, seek medical attention immediately.

NOTE

The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly.

The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and cli- mate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits star- ting capacity.

To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recom- mended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging.

A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life.

Symbols on the battery

Use protective goggles.

Further information in the owner's manual.

Store the battery out of the reach of children.

The battery contains cor- rosive acid.

09 Maintenance and service

Battery 09

219

Avoid sparks and naked flames.

Risk of explosion.

Changing the battery

Removing the battery

1. Switch off the ignition and remove the remote control key.

2. Wait at least 5 minutes before touching any electrical terminals. The car's electrical system has to store information in the con- trol modules.

3. Remove the cover.

4. Disconnect the negative battery lead.

5. Disconnect the positive battery lead.

6. Undo the front wall of the battery box using a screwdriver.

7. Release the clamp securing the battery.

8. Remove the battery.

Fitting the battery

1. Fit the battery into position.

2. Fit the clamp securing the battery.

3. Reinstall the front wall of the battery box.

4. Connect the positive lead.

5. Connect the negative lead.

6. Refit the cover over the battery.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

220

General

All bulb specifications are given on page 283.

The following list contains bulbs and point- source lamps that are specialised or unsuitable for changing except at a workshop:

General interior lighting in the roof

Reading lamps, courtesy lighting and glo- vebox lighting

Direction indicators, door mirror and approach lighting

Brake light

Active Bending Lights (ABL)

WARNING

On cars equipped with Xenon lamps, head- lamp replacement must be performed at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The lamp must be han- dled with extreme caution because it is equipped with a high voltage unit.

IMPORTANT

Never touch the glass part of the bulbs with your fingers. Grease and oil from your fin- gers are vaporised by the heat, coating the reflector and then causing damage.

Changing front bulbs

G 01 95 99

All front bulbs (except for fog lamps) are changed by first removing the lamp housing from the engine compartment.

Removing the lamp housing

1. Remove the remote control key and turn the light switch to position 0.

2. Withdraw the lamp housing's locking pin.

IMPORTANT

Do not pull the electrical cable, only the con- nector.

3. Pull the lamp housing to the side and then forward.

4. Unplug the connector by pressing down the clip with a thumb while moving out the connector with the other hand.

G 01 96 00

5. Lift out the lamp housing and place it on a soft surface to avoid scratching the lens.

Fitting the lamp housing

1. Plug in the connector and refit the lamp housing and locking pin. Check that the pin is correctly inserted.

2. Check the lighting.

The lamp housing must be plugged in and secured in place before the lighting is switched

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

221

on or the remote control key inserted into the ignition switch.

Dipped beam

G 01 91 31

Removing the cover and bulb

1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see page 220.

2. Bend aside the catches and remove the cover.

3. Unplug the connector from the bulb.

4. Release the spring clip securing the bulb. Press it in/down.

5. Pull out the bulb. G 01 91 33

Fitting a new bulb

1. Fit the new bulb. It can only fit in one posi- tion.

2. Press the spring clip in/up and then slightly to the right in order to snap it into position.

3. Press the connector back on.

4. Refit the plastic cover.

5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 220.

Main beam, Halogen

G 01 91 36

The illustration shows a halogen bulb.

1. Undo the whole lamp housing, see page 220.

2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise.

3. Left-hand headlamp:

Turn the bulb holder anticlockwise.

Right-hand headlamp:

Turn the bulb holder clockwise.

4. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the bulb.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

222 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

5. Refit the bulb holder. It can only be refitted in one position.

6. Refit the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it clockwise.

7. Refit the lamp housing, see page 220.

Position/parking lamps

G 01 91 45

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 220.

2. Undo the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it anticlockwise.

3. Withdraw the bulb holder and change the bulb.

4. Press the bulb holder back on. A "click" is heard when the bulb holder is fitted cor- rectly.

5. Refit the cover, located above the lamp housing, by turning it clockwise.

6. Refit the lamp housing, see page 220.

NOTE

A lamp equipped with "Active Bending Lights* has a position lamp (LED) which can- not be replaced.

Direction indicators

G 01 91 50

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 220.

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and remove it.

3. To remove the bulb from the bulb holder, press the bulb in and turn it anticlockwise.

4. Fit a new bulb and refit the bulb holder into the lamp housing.

5. Refit the lamp housing, see page 220.

Side marker lamps

G 01 80 50

1. Undo the lamp housing, see page 220.

2. Twist the bulb holder anticlockwise and withdraw it. Replace the bulb.

3. Refit the bulb holder. It can only fit in one position.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

223

4. Refit the lamp housing, see page 220.

Front fog lamps

G 01 76 09

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Undo the cover by inserting a screwdriver as illustrated (vertically) and continue to press vertically in order to undo the clip inside the cover.

3. Grip the edge of the cover and pull straight out.

4. Unscrew the lamp housing screw and pull it out.

5. Turn the bulb anticlockwise and remove it.

6. Fit a new bulb by turning clockwise. (The profile of the bulb holder corresponds to the profile of the foot of the bulb.)

7. Refit the bulb holder. The TOP mark on the bulb holder must always be upward.

Removing the bulb holder

G 02 09 16

All bulbs in the rear lamp cluster are replaced from inside the cargo area.

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Remove the cover in the panel to access the bulbs. They are fitted in a separate bulb holder.

3. Unplug both connectors from the bulb holder.

4. Press the catches together and at the same time pull out the bulb holder.

5. Replace the bulb and plug in both connec- tors.

6. Press the bulb holder into place and refit the cover.

NOTE

If an error message remains after a faulty bulb has been replaced then we recom- mend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

224

Location of the bulbs in the rear lamp

G 01 80 55

Bulb holder.

Brake light (LED)

Position lamp

Position/parking lamps

Rear fog lamp (one side)

Direction indicators

Reversing lamp

NOTE

The rear fog lamp only illuminates in the left rear light cluster on a left-hand drive car and in the right on a right-hand drive.

Number plate lighting

G 01 48 43

1. Switch off all lights and turn the remote control key to position 0.

2. Remove the screws with a screwdriver.

3. Carefully detach the entire lamp housing and withdraw it. Turn the connector anti- clockwise and pull out the bulb.

4. Replace the bulb.

5. Insert the connector and turn clockwise.

6. Refit the entire lamp housing and screw it into place.

Cargo area

G 02 09 15

1. Insert a screwdriver and gently turn so that the lamp housing comes loose.

2. Remove the blown bulb.

3. Fit a new bulb.

09 Maintenance and service

Replacing bulbs 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 225

Vanity mirror lighting*

G 02 02 53

Removing the mirror glass

1. Insert a screwdriver underneath the lower edge, in the centre. Carefully prize up the lug on the edge.

2. Insert the screwdriver underneath the edge on the left and right-hand sides (by the black rubber sections), and prize carefully so that the glass comes loose in the lower edge.

3. Carefully detach and lift aside the entire mirror glass and cover.

4. Remove the blown bulb and replace it with a new one.

Fitting the mirror glass

1. First, press the three lugs at top edge of mirror glass back into position.

2. Then press the three lower lugs back into position.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

226

General

All electrical functions and components are fused to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting and overload- ing.

The fuses are in two different locations in the car:

Relay/Fuse box in the engine compart- ment.

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compart- ment.

Changing

If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and blew.

1. Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse.

2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown.

3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

Each fuse box has space for several spare fuses. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the component. In which case, Volvo recommends that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop for this to be checked.

WARNING

Never use a foreign object, or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause signifi- cant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

227

Relay/fuse box in the engine compartment

G 00 74 46

The fuse box has 36 fuse positions. Be sure to replace a blown fuse with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage.

19 36 are of the "Mini Fuse" type.

7-18 are of the "JCASE" type, and for their replacement we recommend that you visit an authorised Volvo workshop.

16 are of the "Midi Fuse" type and must only be replaced by a workshop. Volvo rec- ommends an authorised Volvo workshop.

On the inside of the cover are tweezers to assist removing and fitting fuses.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

228 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

G 02 02 50

1. Radiator fan 50 A

2. Power steering (excl. 1.6 litre engine) 80 A

3. Supply to passenger com- partment fuse box 60 A

4. Supply to passenger com- partment fuse box 60 A

5. Climate control element, additional heater PTC* 80 A

6. Glow plugs (4-cyl. diesel) 60 A

Glow plugs (5-cyl. diesel) 70 A

7. ABS pump 40 A

8. ABS valves 20 A

9. Engine functions 30 A

10. Ventilation fan 40 A

11. Headlamp washers 20 A

12. Supply to heated rear window 30 A

13. Starter motor relay 30 A

14. Trailer wiring* 40 A

15. Reserve

16. Supply to infotainment sys- tem 30 A

17. Windscreen wipers 30 A

18. Supply to passenger com- partment fuse box 40 A

19. Reserve

20. Horn 15 A

21. Fuel-driven additional heater, passenger compartment heater* 20 A

22. Reserve

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

229

23. Engine control module ECM (5-cyl. petrol), Transmission (TCM) (5-cyl auto) 10 A

Transmission (TCM) (4-cyl. auto.) 15 A

24. Heated fuel filter, PTC ele- ment oil trap (5-cyl. diesel) 20 A

25. Auxiliary battery (DV6B) 10 A

26. Ignition switch 15 A

27. A/C compressor 10 A

28. Reserve

29. Fog lamp, front 15 A

30. Engine control module ECM (1.6 l petrol, 2.0 l diesel) 3 A

31. Voltage regulator, alternator 4-cyl. 10 A

32. Injectors (5-cyl. petrol), lambda-sond (4-cyl. petrol), charge air cooler (4-cyl. die- sel), mass air flow sensor and turbo control (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

33. Lambda-sond and vacuum pump (5-cyl. petrol), engine control module (5-cyl. diesel), diesel filter heater (4-cyl. die- sel) 20 A

34. Ignition coils (petrol), injectors (1.6 l petrol), fuel pump (4-cyl. diesel), pressure switch, cli- mate control (5-cyl.), glow plugs and EGR emission con- trol (5-cyl. diesel) 10 A

35. Engine sensors for valves, relay coil, air conditioning PTC element, oil trap (5-cyl. petrol), engine control module ECM (5-cyl. diesel), canister (petrol), injectors (1.8/2.0 l petrol), MAF mass air flow sensor (5-cyl. petrol, 4-cyl. diesel), turbo control (4-cyl. diesel), pressure switch power steering (1.6 l petrol), EGR emission control (4-cyl. diesel) 15 A

36. Engine control module ECM (not 5-cyl. diesel, accelerator pedal position sensor, lambda-sond (5-cyl. diesel)) 10 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

230

Relay/Fuse box in the passenger compartment

G 02 06 01

The fuse box has 50 fuse positions. The fuses are located under the glovebox. The box also provides space for several spare fuses. Tools for fuse replacement are located in the relay/ fuse box in the engine compartment, see page 227.

Replacing fuses

1. Remove the trim concealing the fuse box by pressing in the pin in the centre of the clips (1) about one cm and then withdraw- ing the clips.

2. Turn the two wing screws (that secure the fuse box) (2) anticlockwise and remove them.

3. Lower the fuse box (3) half way. Pull it towards the seat until it stops. Lower it

completely. The fuse box can be fully unhooked.

4. Close the fuse box in the reverse order.

5. Remove the pins from the centre of the clips. Fit the trim and the clips. Reinsert the pins into the clips. This expands the clips and secures the trim.

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 231

43. Phone, audio system, RTI*, Bluetooth * 15 A

44. SRS system, engine con- trol module ECM (5-cyl.) 10 A

45. Electrical socket, pas- senger compartment 15 A

46. Passenger compart- ment, glovebox and courtesy lighting 5 A

47. Interior lighting 5 A

48. Washer 15 A

49. SRS system 10 A

50. Reserve

51. Additional heater for the passenger compartment, AWD, fuel filter relay, heating 10 A

52. Transmission control module (TCM), ABS sys- tem 5 A

53. Power steering 10 A

54. Parking assistance, Xenon* 10 A

55. Keyless control module 20 A

56. Remote control module, siren control module 10 A

57. Data link connector (DLC), brake light switch 15 A

58. Main beam (right), auxili- ary lamps relay coil 7.5 A

59. Main beam, left 7.5 A

60. Seat heating (driver's side) 15 A

09 Maintenance and service

Fuses 09

232

61. Seat heating (passenger side) 15 A

62. Sunroof 20 A

63. Supply to rear right door 20 A

64. RDAR

65. Infotainment system 5 A

66. Infotainment control module (ICM), climate control 10 A

67. Reserve

68. Cruise control 5 A

69. Climate control, rain sen- sor, BLIS button 5 A

70. Reserve

71. Reserve

72. Reserve

73. Sunroof, overhead con- sole for interior lighting (OHC), rear seatbelt reminder, autodim mirror 5 A

74. Fuel pump relay 15 A

75. Reserve

76. Reserve

77. Electrical socket in cargo area, accessory elec- tronic module (AEM) 15 A

78. Reserve

79. Reversing lamp 5 A

80. - -

81. Supply to rear left door 20 A

82. Supply to front right door 25 A

83. Supply to front left door 25 A

84. Power passenger seat 25 A

85. Power driver's seat 25 A

86. Interior lighting, cargo area lighting, power seats, fuel level display (1.8F) 5 A

09 Maintenance and service

09

233

234 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General.................................................................................................. 236 Audio functions..................................................................................... 238 Radio functions..................................................................................... 242 CD functions ........................................................................................ 247 Menu structure audio system............................................................. 250 Phone functions*................................................................................... 251 Menu structure phone*....................................................................... 258 Bluetooth handsfree* ........................................................................... 261

INFOTAINMENT SYSTEM

10 Infotainment system

General

10

236 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Infotainment system

G 02 02 45

POWER - Pushbutton, audio system on/ off

Display

Keypad

MENU - Goes to the menu system

Navigation buttons

EXIT - Exits the menu system

ENTER - Selects/activates/deactivates

Infotainment is a system that integrates the audio system and phone*. The infotainment

system can be easily operated using the con- trol panel or the steering wheel keypad*, see page 67. The display (2) shows messages and information on the current function.

Audio system

On/Off

POWER (1) starts/switches off the audio sys- tem. If the audio system is active when the remote control key is turned to position 0 then it continues to be active until the remote control key is removed from the ignition switch. The audio system is started automatically the next time the remote control key is turned to posi- tion I.

Menus

Some infotainment system functions are con- trolled via a menu system. The current menu level is shown at the top right of the display. Menu options are shown in the middle of the display.

MENU (4) leads to the menu system.

Up/down with the navigation button (5) moves between menu options.

ENTER (7) selects/activates/deactivates one of the menu options.

EXIT (6) leads back one step in the menu structure. A long press on EXIT will exit the menu system.

Shortcuts

Menu options are numbered and can also be selected directly with the keypad (3). So first press MENU and then the figure/figures for the desired menu option.

Equipment

The audio system can be equipped with differ- ent options and different versions. There are three audio system versions:

Performance,

High Performance* or

Premuim Sound*

However, FM radio with RDS, AM radio and CD player are included in all audio systems.

10 Infotainment system

General

10

237

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II 1

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II distributes the two stereo audio channels to left, centre, right and rear speakers. This provides a more real- istic sound quality than that provided by stand- ard two-channel stereo.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II and the Dolby icon are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II System is manu- factured under license from Dolby Laboratories Licensing Corporation.

1 Premium Sound.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

238 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Audio controls

VOLUME - Knob

AM/FM Audio source selection

MODE - Audio source selection, CD, AUX and USB (e.g. iPod )1

TUNING - Knob

SOUND - Button

Navigation button - Menus

Volume

Use VOLUME (1) or the steering wheel keypad to regulate the volume, see page 67. Audio vol-

ume adjusts automatically depending on vehi- cle speed, see page 241.

Audio source selection

Repeatedly pressing AM/FM switches between FM1, FM2 and AM.

Repeatedly pressing MODE switches between CD, USB and AUX.

External audio sources

General

AUX input

USB input*

The AUX and USB inputs enable the connec- tion of an external audio source, e.g. an iPod 1 or MP3 player.

If you choose to connect an iPod , MP3 player or a USB memory stick to the USB connection then you can control the media via the car's audio controls.

Use the MODE button to select the external audio source you wish to use.

1. If USB is selected then Connect device is shown in the display.

2. Connect your iPod , MP3 player or USB memory stick to the USB connection in the centre console's storage compartment (see preceding illustration). > The text Loading appears on the dis-

play when the system loads the file structure on the storage media. This takes a while.

When the loading is finished the track informa- tion is shown on the display and it is possible to select the track required.

Track selection can take place in the following three ways:

1 USB only applies for High Performance and Premium Sound. The iPod trademark belongs to Apple Computer Inc.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

239

Select TUNING (4) clockwise or anticlock- wise.

Use the right or left-hand button (6) of the navigation control to scroll to the desired track.

With the steering wheel keypad.

In USB or iPod mode the infotainment system operates in an equivalent way to the CD player for playing back music files. For more information, see page 247.

NOTE

The system supports the playback of music files in the MP3, WMA and WAV file formats. However, there are variants of these file for- mats that are not supported by the system. The system also supports most iPod mod- els produced in 2005 or later. iPod Shuffle is not supported.

USB memory

To facilitate the use of USB memory avoid stor- ing any files other than music files in the mem- ory. It takes considerably longer for the system to load storage media that contains items other than playable music files.

NOTE

The system supports removable media which is compatible with USB 2.0 and the FAT32 file system, and can handle a maxi- mum of 500 folders and 64 000 files. The memory must have a capacity of at least 256 Mb.

MP3 player

Many MP3 players have their own file systems that are not supported by the audio system. For use in the system, an MP3 player must be set in USB Removable device/Mass Storage

Device mode.

iPod

An iPod is charged and supplied with power by the USB connection via the player's con- nection cable. However, if the player's battery is completely discharged then it must be charged before the player is connected.

NOTE

When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's infotainment system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure.

For information on USB and iPod in combi- nation with Performance audio, see the acces-

sory manual for USB and iPod Music Inter- face.

AUX

Sometimes the AUX external audio source can be heard at a different volume to the internal audio sources, e.g. the CD player. If the audio volume of the external audio source is too high then the sound quality can be impaired. Pre- vent this by adjusting the input volume of the AUX input.

NOTE

The sound quality may be impaired if the player is charged while the audio system is in AUX mode, so avoid charging the player.

Audio settings

Adjusting audio settings

Press SOUND (5) repeatedly to browse among the following options. Adjust by turning TUNING.

BASS - Bass level.

TREBLE - Treble level.

FADER Balance between the front and rear speakers.

BALANCE Balance between the left and right-hand speakers.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

240 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

SUBWOOFER* - Bass speaker level. Sub- woofer must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deactivating the subwoofer below.

CENTRE2 - Level for centre speaker. Three channel stereo or Pro Logic II must be activated before adjustment is possible, see under the heading Activating/deacti- vating surround sound below.

SURROUND2 - Level for surround. Pro Logic II must be activated before adjust- ment is possible, see under the heading Audio settings below.

Activating/deactivating the subwoofer

Press MENU and then ENTER.

Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

Scroll to Subwoofer and press ENTER.

Surround2

Surround settings govern the spatial perception of the sound. Settings and activating/deactivating are sep- arate for each audio source.

G 02 12 16

The Dolby icon in the display indicates that Dolby Pro Logic II is active. There are three different settings for surround sound:

Dolby Pro Logic II

3 channel

Off - 2 channel stereo.

Activating/deactivating surround sound

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Surround FM, Surround

AM, Surround CDor Surround

AUX and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Dolby Pro Logic II3, 3 channel

or Off and press ENTER.

Equalizer front/rear4

The equalizer can be used to adjust different frequency bands separately.

Adjusting equalizer

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Equalizer front or Equalizer

rear and press ENTER.

4. The graphic on the display indicates the audio level of the frequency in question.

5. Adjust the level with TUNING (4) or up/ down with the navigation button. Addi- tional frequencies can be selected using the left/right navigation button.

6. Save with ENTER or EXIT to exit without saving the settings.

2 Premium Sound. 3 Not available in AM and FM mode. 4 Certain audio systems.

10 Infotainment system

Audio functions

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 241

Automatic volume control5

The auto volume control function allows the audio volume to increase as the speed of the car increases. There are three levels to choose from: Low, Medium and High.

Adjusting automatic volume control

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Audio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Auto. volume control and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Low, Medium or High and press ENTER.

Optimum sound reproduction

The audio system is calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing.

This calibration takes into account loudspeak- ers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position etc. for each com- bination of car model and audio system.

There is a also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the position of the volume control, radio reception and vehicle speed.

The controls explained in these operating instructions, e.g. bass, treble and equalizer*

are only intended for the user to be able to adapt the sound reproduction according to personal taste.

5 Not Performance

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

242

Radio controls

G 01 98 06

FM/AM Wavelength selection

Station presets

TUNING Knob for station searches

SCAN Scanning

Navigation button - Tuning and menus

EXIT - Cancel current function

AUTO Automatic storage of stations

Tuning

Automatic tuning

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Give a brief press on or .

The radio then automatically searches for the next strong station.

Manual tuning

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Adjust the frequency by turning TUNING

(3).

Tune into a station with a long press on or . Or by using the steering wheel keypad:

Hold in or on the navigation button depressed until the desired frequency appears on the display.

As long as the frequency graphic appears on the display, searching can be resumed by briefly pressing or .

Storing stations

Ten station presets can be stored per wave- length. FM has two memories for presets: FM1 and FM2. Preset stations are selected using the preset buttons (2) or the steering wheel keypad.

Storing stations manually

1. Tune into a station.

2. Hold a station preset button depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display.

Automatic storage of stations

AUTO (7) seeks out the ten strongest radio sta- tions and stores them automatically in a sepa- rate memory. The function is especially useful in areas where the radio stations and their fre- quencies are unfamiliar.

Starting automatic storage of stations

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM (1).

2. Hold AUTO (7) depressed until Autostoring appears on the display.

Once Autostoring disappears from the dis- play, the stations are stored. The radio contin- ues in Auto mode and Auto appears on the display. The automatically stored presets can now be selected using the preset buttons (2).

Cancelling automatic storage of stations

Press EXIT (6).

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

243

Selecting an auto-stored preset

Allowing the radio to remain in Auto mode pro- vides access to the autostored presets.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.

2. Press a preset button (2). > The radio remains in Auto mode until it

is exited by a brief press on AUTO (7), EXIT (6) or AM/FM (1) cancels Auto mode.

Storing autostored presets in another

memory

An autostored preset can be transferred to the FM or AM memory.

1. Briefly press AUTO (7). > Auto appears on the display.

2. Press the preset button for the station you want to move.

3. Press the button under which the station will be stored and hold it depressed until the message Station stored appears on the display. > The radio exits Auto mode and the

stored station can be selected as a pre- set.

Scanning

SCAN (4) automatically searches through a wavelength for strong stations. When a station is found, it is played for approx. 8 seconds before scanning is resumed.

Activating/deactivating Scan

1. Select wavelength using AM/FM.

2. Press SCAN to activate. > SCAN appears on the display. Close

using SCAN or EXIT.

Storing a station

A selected station can be stored as a preset while SCAN is active.

Press a station preset button and hold it depressed until the message Station

stored appears on the display. > Scanning is interrupted and the stored

station can be selected as a preset.

RDS functions

Radio Data System - RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions:

Automatically switches to a stronger trans- mitter if reception in the area is poor.

Searches for programme form, such as traffic information or news.

Receives text information on current radio programme.

Some radio stations do not use RDS or only some if its functionality.

Programme functions

In FM mode, the radio can search for stations with certain programme types. If a required programme type is located the radio can switch stations interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player is in use, it is paused. The interrupting trans- mission is played at a preset audio volume, see page 246. The radio returns to the previous audio source and audio volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast.

The programme functions alarm (ALARM!), traffic information (TP), news (News), and pro- gramme types (PTY) interrupt one another in order of priority, where alarm has the highest priority and programme types has the lowest.

If you want to return to the interrupted audio source before the message or programme type has been completed, press EXIT.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

244

For further programme interruption settings, see EON and REG see page 245. The pro- gramme functions are modified via the menu system, see page 236.

Alarm

This function is used to warn of serious acci- dents and catastrophes. The alarm cannot be temporarily interrupted or deactivated. The message ALARM! appears on the display when an alarm message is transmitted.

Traffic information TP

This function allows traffic informa- tion broadcast within a set station's RDS network to break through. TP

shows that the function has been activated. If the set station can send traffic information then appears on the display.

G 02 12 20

Activating/deactivating TP

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

TP from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with traffic information from only the set (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to TP station and press ENTER. > Either TP from current station or TP

from all stations is shown on the dis- play.

6. Press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating TP search

TP search is useful during long journeys while an audio source other than the radio is being played. The function automatically searches for traffic information within different RDS networks.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to TP and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to TP search and press ENTER.

News

This function allows news broad- casts within a set station's RDS network to break through. The message News shows that the func-

tion is active.

G 02 12 21

Activating/deactivating News

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to News and press ENTER.

News from current station/all stations

The radio can interrupt with news from only the set (current) station or from all stations.

1. Select an FM station.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to News station and press ENTER. > Either Press ENTER to receive news

from this station only. or News from

all stations is shown on the display.

5. Press ENTER.

Programme types PTY

The PTY function can be used to select different programme types, such as Pop music and Serious

classic. The PTY symbol indicates that the function is active. This function allows programme types broadcast within a set sta- tion's RDS network to break through.

G 02 12 22

Activating/deactivating PTY

1. Select FM1 or FM2 with FM/AM.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

245

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select PTY and press ENTER. > A list of programme types appears:

Current affairs, Information etc. The PTY function is activated by selecting programme types and deactivated by clearing all PTYs.

5. Select the desired programme types or Clear all PTY

Search PTY

This function searches the entire wavelength for the selected programme type.

1. Activate PTY.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Search PTY and press ENTER.

If the radio finds any of the selected pro- gramme types, >| To seek appears on the dis- play. Press the navigation button to con- tinue searching for another broadcast of the selected programme types.

Display of programme type

The programme type of the current station can be shown on the display.

NOTE

Not all radio stations support this function.

Activating/deactivating display

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to PTY and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Show PTY and press ENTER.

Radio text

Some RDS stations transmit information on programme content, artists, etc. This informa- tion can be shown on the display.

Activating/deactivating radio text

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Radio text and press ENTER.

Automatic frequency update AF

The AF function selects one of the strongest transmitters for a set station. The radio may sometimes need to search through the entire FM wavelength to find a strong transmitter. If this occurs, the radio mutes and PI Seek

Press EXIT to cancel. appears in the display.

Activating/deactivating AF

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to AF and press ENTER.

Regional radio programmes REG

This function causes the radio to con- tinue with a regional transmitter even if its signal strength is low. Regional indicates that the function

is active. The regional function is normally deactivated.

G 02 12 23

Activating/deactivating REG

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Regional and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Radio functions

10

246

Enhanced Other Networks EON

The EON function is especially useful in urban areas with many regional radio stations. It allows the distance between the car and the radio station transmitter to determine when programme functions should interrupt the cur- rent audio source.

Local interrupts only if the radio station transmitter is close.

Distant interrupts if the station transmit- ter is far away, even if there is a lot of static.

Off no interruption for programmes from other transmitters.

Activating/deactivating EON

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to EON and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Local, Distant or Off and press ENTER.

Resetting RDS functions

Resets all radio settings to the original factory settings.

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Advanced radio settings and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Reset all and press ENTER.

Volume control, programme types

The interrupting programme types are heard at the volume selected for each programme type. If the volume level is adjusted during the pro- gramme interruption, the new level is saved until the next programme interruption.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 247

CD function controls

G 01 98 07

Navigation button Fast forward/rewind, track selection and menus

CD changer position selection*

CD insertion/eject

CD insertion/eject slot

MODE - Selection of audio source (CD, AUX, USB*)

TUNING - Knob for track selection

Starting playback (CD player)

If a music CD is in the player when the audio system is in CD mode then playback is started

automatically. Otherwise, load a disc and change to CD mode by pressing MODE.

Start playback (CD changer*)

If a CD position with a music CD is already selected when the audio system is activated then playback starts automatically. Otherwise change to CD changer mode using MODE and select a disc with the number buttons 16 or Up/Down on the navigation button.

Insert a CD

1. Select an empty position with buttons 1

6 or Up/Down on the navigation button. > An empty position is marked on the dis-

play. The text Insert disc shows that a new disc can be inserted. The CD changer can hold up to 6 CD discs.

2. Inserting a CD in the CD changer.

CD eject

A CD will stay in the ejected position for approx. 12 seconds. Following which it is re- inserted in the player and playback continues.

Eject individual discs by pressing the eject but- ton (3).

Eject all discs with a long press on the eject button. The entire magazine is emptied disc by disc. The message EJECT ALL is shown in the display.

Pause

If the volume is turned down completely, the CD player is stopped. The player is restarted when volume is increased.

Audio files*

The CD player/CD changer* also supports MP3 and WMA format audio files.

NOTE

Certain types of copy-protected audio files cannot be read by the player.

When a CD containing audio files is inserted into the player the disc's folder structure is loa- ded in. It may take a while before playback starts due to the quality of the disc.

Navigation and playback

If a disc with audio files is inserted in the CD player then the disc's folder structure is shown by pressing ENTER. The folder struc- ture is navigated in the same way as the audio system's menu structure. Audio files have the symbol and folders have the symbol . Start audio file playback with ENTER.

When the playback of a file is finished the play- back of the other files in the same folder con- tinues. Folder change takes place automati-

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

248

cally when all files in the current folder have been played back.

Press left/right on the navigation button if the display is not wide enough to show the whole audio file name.

Fast-wind/change CD tracks and audio

files

Short presses right/left on the navigation but- ton are used to scroll between CD tracks/audio files. Long presses are used to fast-wind CD tracks/audio files. TUNING (or the steering wheel keypad) can also be used for this purpose.

Scan CD

This function plays the first 10 seconds of each CD track/audio file. Press SCAN to activate. Interrupt with EXIT or SCAN to continue play- back of the current CD track/audio file.

Random

This function plays the tracks in random order. The random CD tracks/audio files can be scrol- led through in the normal way.

NOTE

It is only possible to scroll between random CD tracks 1 on the current disc.

Different messages appear on the display depending on which random function has been selected:

RANDOM means that the tracks from only one music CD are played

RND ALL means that all tracks on all music CDs in the CD changer are played.

RND FLD means that the audio files in a folder on the current CD are played.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

player)

If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

If a disc with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Folder or Disc and press ENTER.

Activating/deactivating, random (CD

changer)

If a normal music CD is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or All discs and press ENTER.

The option All discs only applies to the music CDs in the changer.

If a CD with audio files is being played:

1. Press MENU and then ENTER.

2. Scroll to Random and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Single disc or Folder and press ENTER.

The function is deactivated when another CD is selected.

Disc text

If title information is stored on a music CD then it can be shown on the display2.

Activating/deactivating

1. Start CD playback.

2. Press MENU and then ENTER.

3. Scroll to Disc text and press ENTER.

1 Applies to the CD changer. 2 Applies to CD changer.

10 Infotainment system

CD functions

10

249

CDs

Using low quality CD discs could result in poor or non-existent sound.

IMPORTANT

Only use standard discs (12 cm in diameter). Do not use CD discs with adhesive disc labels. The heat in the CD player may cause the label to come off, damaging the CD player.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure audio system

10

250 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Overview

FM MENU

1. News

2. TP

3. PTY

4. Radio text

5. Advanced radio settings

6.* Audio settings

AM MENU

1.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD player with CD disc.

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD player with MP3 disc.

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text

6.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD changer* with CD disc selected.

1. Random

2. News

3. TP

4. Disc text

5.* Audio settings

CD MENU

For CD changer* with MP3 disc selected.

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Disc text

6.* Audio settings

AUX MENU

1. AUX input volume

2. News

3. TP

4.* Audio settings

USB MENU*

1. Playlist

2. Random

3. News

4. TP

5. Track information

6. Audio settings

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 251

Phone system components.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

252 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phone system components

Antenna1

Steering wheel keypad. Most phone sys- tem functions can be accessed via the key- pad. see page 253.

Microphone. The microphone for hands- free is fitted in the roof by the sun visor.

Centre console control panel. All phone functions (except call volume) can be regu- lated via the control panel.

Privacy handset*

SIM card reader

General

Always put traffic safety first.

If the driver needs to use the privacy hand- set*, park the car in a safe place first.

Switch off the phone system when refuel- ling the car.

Switch off the system near blasting work.

Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop carries out phone system servicing.

Emergency calls

Emergency calls to alarm centres can be made without a SIM card as long as there is coverage by a network operator.

Making an emergency call

1. Activate the phone.

2. Ring the emergency number that applies to your region (within EU: 112).

3. Press ENTER.

IDIS

With the IDIS system (Intelligent Driver Information System), incoming phone calls and SMS messages can be delayed so that con- centration can be focused on driving when IDIS determines that the traffic situation requires a high level of attention.

Incoming calls and SMS messages can be delayed 5 seconds before they are diverted. If the current traffic situation still requires a high level of attention from the driver then the incoming call is diverted to the voice mail. Missed calls are shown in the display.

IDIS be disconnected using menu function 6.5, see page 258.

SIM card

G 02 02 44

The phone can only be used with a valid SIM card Subscriber Identity Module. Cards are available from various network operators. In the event of problems with the card, contact your network operator.

NOTE

The built-in phone cannot read 3G type SIM cards (3G only). Combined 3G/GSM cards work. Contact your network operator if a replacement SIM card is required.

1 Available only for built-in phone or RTI.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 253

Extra SIM card

Many network operators offer two SIM cards for the same phone number. The extra SIM card can be used in the car.

Inserting the SIM card

1. Switch off the phone and open the glove- box.

2. Pull out the SIM card holder from the SIM card reader, see illustration on page 252.

3. Position the SIM card in the holder with the metal surface visible. The bevelled edge of the SIM card should align with the bevel of the SIM card holder.

4. Carefully press in the SIM card holder.

Menus

Page 258 describes how to control phone functions with the menu system.

Traffic safety

For safety reasons, parts of the phone menu system cannot be accessed at speeds in excess of 8 km/h.

Phone controls

G 01 98 09

Centre console control panel.

VOLUME - Control the background vol- ume from the radio, for example, during a call

Number and letter buttons

MENU - Opens the main menu

EXIT - End/refuse calls, clear entered char- acters

Navigation button Scroll in menus and character rows

ENTER Accept calls. A press of the but- ton reveals latest dialled numbers

PHONE - On/off and standby mode

Steering wheel keypad

G 02 02 43

When the phone is active, the steering wheel keypad is locked to phone functions. To con- trol the audio system, the phone must be in standby mode (standby).

ENTER Works the same as on the control panel

EXIT Works the same as on the control panel

Call volume Increase/decrease

Navigation buttons Scroll in menus

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

254 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

On/Off

A handset appears in the display when the phone system is active or in standby mode (standby). If the remote control key is turned to position 0 when the phone is in one of these modes, the phone automatically resumes this mode the next time the remote control key is turned to position I or II.

Activating the phone system

Phone system functions can only be used when the phone is in active mode.

1. Press PHONE.

2. Enter the PIN code (if necessary) and press ENTER.

Deactivating the phone system

No calls can be received when the phone is deactivated.

Hold PHONE depressed until the phone is deactivated.

Standby mode (standby)

In standby mode, the audio system can be in use while calls are received. However, it is not possible to make calls when in standby mode.

Putting the phone in standby mode

The phone must first be in active mode before it can be put in standby mode.

Press PHONE.

Activating from standby mode

Press PHONE.

Making and receiving calls

To call

1. Activate the phone system (if necessary).

2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 256.

3. Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release the handset by pressing it down.

NOTE

If the privacy handset* is off the hook when a phone call is started, the sound will come from the handsfree system. For information on switching between privacy handset and handsfree during a call, see page 256

Receiving a call

For Auto answer, see menu option 4.3, see page 258.

Press ENTER or lift the handset. Release the handset by pressing it down.

Ending a call

Press EXIT or hang up the handset.

Refusing a call

Press EXIT.

Call waiting

A two-tone signal during a phone call indicates that there is another incoming call. Answer? is shown in the display. The call can be refused or taken in the normal manner. If the incoming call is taken, the previous call is put on hold.

Putting a call on hold/resuming a call

1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Hold or Resume and press ENTER.

Dialling a third party

1. Put the call on hold.

2. Dial the number of the third party.

Switching between calls

1. Press MENU or ENTER.

2. Scroll to Swap and press ENTER.

Starting a conference call

A conference call consists of three parties that can talk to one another. Once a conference call has been initiated, no more parties can be con- nected. All calls are ended when a conference call is ended.

1. Start two phone calls.

2. Press MENU or ENTER.

3. Scroll to Join and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 255

Volume

The phone uses the driver's door speaker.

Call volume

Call volume is regulated with the steering wheel keypad.

If the privacy handset* is used, volume is regulated with a wheel on the side of the handset.

Audio system volume

Audio system volume is temporarily lowered during a phone call. Once the call is ended the previous volume is resumed. If the volume is regulated during the call, the new level is retained once the call is ended. Sound can also be automatically muted during a phone call, see menu 6.4.3, on page 258. This function only applies to the Volvo integrated phone sys- tem.

Entering text

Text is entered using the phone keypad.

1. Press the key with the desired character - once for the first character on the button, twice for the second, etc. See table.

2. Press 1 for a space. If two characters in a row are to be entered using the same but- ton, press * or wait a few seconds.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. A long press on EXIT will clear all entered characters.

Key Function

space 1 - ? ! , . : " ' ( )

a b c 2

d e f 3

g h i 4

j k l 5

m n o 6

p q r s 7

t u v 8

w x y z 9

Pressed briefly if two char- acters shall be entered after each other with the same key.

Key Function

+ 0 @ * # & $ / %

Switch between upper and lower case.

Handling numbers

Calling the last number dialled

The phone automatically stores the last phone numbers dialled.

1. Press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a number and press ENTER.

Phone book

If the phone book contains a live caller's con- tact information then this is shown in the dis- play. Contact information can be stored on the SIM card and in the phone.

Storing contacts in the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to New contact and press ENTER.

4. Enter a name and press ENTER.

5. Enter a number and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

256 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

6. Scroll to SIM card or Phone memory and press ENTER.

Searching for contacts in the phone book

Use the down arrow of the navigation button instead of MENU for direct access to the Search menu.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

Copying entries between the SIM card

and Phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Copy all and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to SIM to phone or Phone to SIM

and press ENTER.

Deleting contacts from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Search and press ENTER.

4. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

5. Scroll to the item to be erased and press ENTER.

6. Scroll to Erase and press ENTER.

Erase all contacts

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Erase SIM or Erase phone and press ENTER.

If required, enter phone code. The factory-set default code is 1234.

Speed dial

A keypad button (19) can be used as a speed dial number for a contact in the phone book.

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Speed dial and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to Select numbers and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to the digit of the keypad button for the speed dial number and press ENTER.

6. Enter the first few letters of the item and press ENTER, or simply press ENTER.

7. Scroll to an item and press ENTER.

8. Hold EXIT depressed to leave the menu system.

Calling using speed dial

Briefly press the required keypad button, followed by ENTER.

NOTE

It takes a short time before speed dialling becomes available after the phone has been activated.

To use the speed dial function Speed dial

must be activated in the Phone book menu, see page 260.

Calling from the phone book

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Phone book and press ENTER. > All contacts in the phone book memory

are displayed. The number of contacts displayed can be reduced by entering part of the contact's name.

3. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER.

10 Infotainment system

Phone functions*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 257

NOTE

Press ENTER to dial.

NOTE

Hold in the required letter/button in the key- pad for about 2 seconds to reach the cor- responding letter in the phone book.

Functions during a call

Several functions are available during a call. Some functions can only be used when a call is on hold.

Press MENU or ENTER during a call to access the In-call menu and scroll to one of the fol- lowing alternatives:

1. Mute microphone/Microphone on Mute mode.

2. Hold/Resume - Put a call on hold or resume a call.

3. Handsfree/Privacy handset - Use handsfree or the privacy handset*.

4. Phone book Show phone book.

5. Join Conference calling (available if more than two parties are connected)

6. Swap Switch between two calls (availa- ble if up to three parties are connected).

SMS - Short Message Service

Reading SMS

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Read and press ENTER.

4. Scroll to a message and press ENTER. > The message text is shown in the dis-

play. Additional selections can be made by pressing ENTER. Hold EXIT

depressed to leave the menu system.

Writing and sending

1. Press MENU.

2. Scroll to Messages and press ENTER.

3. Scroll to Write new and press ENTER.

4. Enter text and press ENTER.

5. Scroll to Send and press ENTER.

6. Enter a phone number and press ENTER.

IMEI number

To block the phone, you must provide your network operator with the phone's IMEI num- ber. This is a 15 digit serial number that is pro- grammed into the phone. Dial *#06# to show this number in the display. Write it down and keep it in a safe place.

Specifications

Output 2 W

SIM card Small

Memory entries 250A

SMS (Short Message Serv- ice)

Yes

Data/Fax No

Dualband (900/1800 MHz) Yes

A In the phone, plus the number of memory spaces that are available on the SIM card.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

258 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Phone menu

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

1.4. Erase list

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. New contact

2.3. Copy all

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

2.4.1. Active

2.4.2. Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

2.6. Erase phone

2.7. Memory status

3. Messages

3.1. Read

3.2. Write new

3.3. Message settings

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4 Call options

4.1. Send my number

4.2. Call waiting

4.3. Automatic answer

4.4. Auto re-dial

4.5. Voice mail number

4.6. Diversions

4.6.1. All calls

4.6.2. When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.37. Added phones1

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Network selection

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

1 A maximum of 5 phones.

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 259

6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

6.4. Sounds and volume

6.4.1. Ring volume

6.4.2. Ring signals

6.4.3. Mute radio

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

6.6. Reset phone settings

Description of menu options

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed

List of missed calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.2. Last 10 received

List of received calls. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.3. Last 10 dialled

List of dialled numbers. You can choose to call, erase or store the number in the phone book.

1.4. Erase list

Erase the lists found in the menus 1.1, 1.2 and 1.3 as below.

1.4.1. All calls

1.4.2. Missed calls

1.4.3. Received calls

1.4.4. Dialled numbers

1.5. Call duration

Duration of all calls or of the most recent call. To reset the call timer, see menu 1.5.4.

1.5.1. Last call

1.5.2. Call count

1.5.3. Total time

1.5.4. Reset timers

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

Search for a name in the phone book.

2.2. New contact

Store names and phone numbers in the phone book, see page 255.

2.3. Copy all

Copy phone numbers and names from the SIM card to the phone memory.

2.3.1. SIM to phone

2.3.2. Phone to SIM

2.4. Speed dial

A number stored in the phone book can be stored as a speed dial number.

2.4.1 Active

2.4.2 Select numbers

2.5. Erase SIM

Erase the entire SIM card memory.

2.6. Erase phone

Erase the entire phone memory.

2.7. Memory status

Shows how many positions are occupied in the SIM card and phone memory. The table shows how many of the total number of positions are occupied, e.g. 100 (250).

3. Messages

3.1. Read

Received text messages. Select whether to erase, forward, change or save the entire mes- sage or parts of it.

3.2. Write new

Write a message using the keypad. Choose whether to save or send it.

3.3. Message settings

Enter the number (SMSC number) of the mes- sage centre to which messages are to be trans- ferred as well as how long they are to be saved at the message centre. Contact your network

10 Infotainment system

Menu structure phone*

10

260 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

operator for information on message settings. Normally, these settings should not be altered.

3.3.1. SMSC number

3.3.2. Validity time

3.3.3. Message type

4. Call settings

4.1. Send my number

Displays or hides your phone number to/from the person you call. Contact your network operator regarding ex-directory numbers.

4.2. Call waiting

Be alerted during a phone call that there is another incoming call.

4.3. Auto answer

Automatically answers incoming calls.

4.4. Auto redial

Automatically calls a previously engaged num- ber.

4.5. Voice mail number

Stores voice mail number.

4.6. Call divert

Choose when and what type of calls are to be diverted to a specified phone number.

4.6.1. All calls

This setting only applies during the call in pro- gress.

4.6.2 When busy

4.6.3. Not answered

4.6.4. Not reachable

4.6.5. Fax calls

4.6.6. Data calls

4.6.7. Cancel all

5. Change phone

5.1. Car phone

Select the built-in phone.

5.2. Add phone

Add mobile phones to the list Added phones.

5.3-7. Added phones

Select to connect to one of the added phones (up to 5 phones).

NOTE

The menu above only applies to cars with BluetoothTM handsfree.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Selecting network

Choose a network automatically or manually. The selected network is shown in the display in the phone's basic mode.

6.1.1. Automatic

6.1.2. Manual select

6.2. SIM security

Select if the PIN code should be on, off or if the phone should automatically give the PIN code.

6.2.1. On

6.2.2. Off

6.2.3. Automatic

6.3. Edit PIN code

Change PIN code. Write down and save the code in a safe place.

6.4. Sounds and volume

6.4.1. Ring volume

Adjust the ring tone volume.

6.4.2. Ring signals

There are seven different ring tones.

6.4.3. Mute radio

The radio can be switched off/on.

6.4.4. Message beep

6.5. IDIS

If the IDIS function is deactivated, incoming calls are not delayed, regardless of the driving situation.

6.6. Reset phone settings

Reset the system's factory settings.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 261

General

System overview.

Mobile phone

Microphone

Centre console

Bluetooth TM

A mobile phone equipped with BluetoothTM

can be connected wirelessly to the audio sys- tem. The audio system then works handsfree, with the option to control a range of the mobile phone's functions remotely. The microphone is fitted in the roof console (2). The mobile phone can always be operated by its own keys irre- spective of whether or not it is connected.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the handsfree function. Volvo recommends that you seek assis- tance from an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Menus and controls

The menus are navigated using the control panel in the centre console (3), see page 253.

Remember

The menus are controlled from the centre con- sole and the steering wheel keypad. For gen- eral information on menus, see page 258.

NOTE

If the car is equipped with both BluetoothTM handsfree and built-in phone then there is an additional menu in the phone menu, see page 258.

Activating/deactivating

A short press on PHONE activates the hands- free function. The text PHONE at the top of the display shows that it is in phone mode. The symbol shows that the handsfree func- tion is active.

One long press on PHONE deactivates the handsfree function and disconnects a con- nected phone.

Connect mobile phone

A mobile phone is connected in different ways depending on whether or not it has been con- nected previously. To connect a mobile phone for the first time, follow the instructions below:

Alternative 1 - via the car's menu system

1. Make the mobile phone detectable/visible via BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual or www.volvocars.com.

2. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. > Menu option Add phone appears on

the display. If one or more mobile phones have already been registered then these are also shown.

3. Select Add phone. > The audio system searches for mobile

phones in the vicinity. The search takes approximately 30 seconds. The mobile phones detected are specified with their respective BluetoothTM name in the dis- play. The handsfree function's BluetoothTM name is shown in the mobile phone as My Car.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

262 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

4. Choose one of the mobile phones in the audio system display.

5. Enter the number series shown in the audio system display via the mobile phone key- pad.

Alternative 2 - via the phone's menu system

1. Activate the handsfree function with PHONE. If there is a phone connected, disconnect the connected phone.

2. Search with the phone's BluetoothTM, see the mobile phone's manual.

3. Select My Car in the list of units detected in your mobile phone.

4. Enter the PIN code '1234' into the mobile phone when prompted for the PIN code.

5. Select to connect to My Car from the mobile phone.

The mobile phone is registered and connected automatically to the audio system while the text Synchronising appears on the display. For more information on how mobile phones are registered, see page 263.

When the connection is established the symbol is shown and the mobile phone's

BluetoothTM name is shown in the display. Now

the mobile phone can be controlled from the audio system.

To call

1. Make sure that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.

2. Dial the number or use the phone book, see page 264.

3. Press ENTER.

The call is interrupted with EXIT.

Disconnecting the mobile phone

Automatic disconnection takes place if the mobile phone moves out of the audio system's range. For more information on connection, see page 263.

Manual disconnection takes place by deacti- vating the handsfree function with one long press on PHONE. The handsfree function is also deactivated when the engine is switched off or when a door is opened1.

When the mobile phone has been discon- nected an ongoing call can be continued with the mobile phone's built-in microphone and speaker.

NOTE

Some mobile phones require that the changeover from handsfree is confirmed from the phone's keypad.

Making and receiving calls

Incoming call

Calls are accepted with ENTER even if the audio system is in CD or FM mode for example. Refuse or end with EXIT.

Auto answer

The automatic answer function means that calls are accepted automatically. Activate/ deactivate under Phone Menu Call

options Automatic answer.

In-call menu

Press MENU or ENTER during an ongoing call to access the following functions:

Mute microphone - audio system micro- phone is muted.

Transfer call to mobile - the call is trans- ferred to the mobile phone.

1 Applies to Keyless Drive.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 263

NOTE

With certain mobile phones the connection is terminated when the privacy function is used. This is normal. The handsfree function asks if you want to reconnect.

Phone book searching in the phone book.

NOTE

A new call cannot be started during an ongoing call.

Audio settings

Call volume

Call volume can be adjusted during calls. Use the steering wheel keypad.

Audio system volume

In phone mode (PHONE) the audio system vol- ume can be adjusted as usual with VOLUME.

The audio source can be automatically muted for incoming calls under Phone Menu

Phone settings Sounds and volume

Mute radio.

Ring volume

Go to Phone Menu Phone settings

Sounds and volume Ring volume

and adjust with / on the navigation but- ton.

Ring signals

The handsfree function has integrated ring sig- nals that can be selected under Phone

Menu Phone settings Sounds and

volume Ring signals Ring signal 1

etc.

NOTE

The connected mobile phone's ring signal is not deactivated when one of the handsfree system's integrated signals is used.

In order to select the connected phone's ring signal2, go to Phone Menu Phone

settings Sounds and volume Ring

signals Use mobile phone signal.

More on registering and connecting

A maximum of five mobile phones can be reg- istered. Registration is performed once per phone. After registration the mobile phone is in the list of added phones. Not more than one mobile phone can be connected at a time. Phones can be deregistered under Phone

Menu Bluetooth Remove phone.

Automatic connection

When the handsfree function is active and the last mobile phone connected is in range it is connected automatically. When the audio sys- tem searches for the last phone connected its name is shown in the display. To change over to manual connection of another phone, press EXIT.

Manual connection

If you want to connect a mobile phone other than the last connected or change the con- nected mobile phone, proceed as follows:

Set the audio system in phone mode (PHONE) and follow the instructions on the display or change the connected mobile phone by using the menu system as described below.

The menu structure is available in two variants depending on whether the car only has

2 Not supported by all mobile phones.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

264 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

BluetoothTM or if the car also has a built-in phone.

For cars with only BluetoothTM the connec- tion is made under Phone Menu

Bluetooth Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.

For cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM the connection is made under Phone Menu Change phone Add

phone or select one of the previously con- nected phones.

Phonebook

All use of the phone book presupposes that the text PHONE is shown at the top of the display and that the symbol is visible.

The audio system stores a copy of the phone book from each registered mobile phone. The phone book is copied automatically to the audio system during each connection. Deacti- vate the function under Phone settings

Synchronise phone book. Searching for con- tacts is only performed in the connected mobile phone's phone book.

NOTE

If the mobile phone does not support copy- ing of the phone book then List is empty is shown when copying is finished.

If the phone book contains a ringing caller's contact information then this is shown in the display.

Searching for contacts

The easiest way to search in the phone book is with long presses on the keys 29. This starts a search in the phone book based on the key's first letter.

The phone book can also be reached with / on the navigation button or with / on

the steering wheel keypad. The search can also be performed from the phone book's Search menu under Phone book Search:

1. Enter the first few letters of the contact and press ENTER. Or simply press ENTER.

2. Scroll to a contact and press ENTER to call.

Voice recognition

The mobile phone's voice recognition function for dialling can be used by holding in ENTER.

NOTE

Only a selection of mobile phones are fully compatible with the voice recognition func- tion. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo dealer or visit www.volvocars.com for information on compatible phones.

Voice mail number

The number to the voice mail is changed under Call options Voice mail number. If no number is stored then this menu is reached with one long press on 1. Press 1 for a long time to use the stored number.

Call lists

The call lists are copied to the handsfree func- tion at each new connection and are then updated during the connection. Press ENTER

to show the last dialled. Other call lists are available under Call register.

NOTE

Certain mobile phones show a list of the last dialled calls in reverse order.

Inputting text

Input text using the keypad in the centre con- sole. Press once for the key's first character,

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 265

twice for the second etc. Continue pressing for more characters, see the table on page 255.

A short press on EXIT deletes an input char- acter. One long press on EXIT clears all input characters. / on the navigation button scrolls between the characters.

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree

NOTE

The menu for BluetoothTM handsfree is available in two variants. For cars with only BluetoothTM handsfree and for cars with built-in phone and BluetoothTM handsfree.

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth

3.1. Change phone

3.1.1. Add phone

3.1.26.Added phones3

3.2. Remove phone

3.3. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.4. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. Phone settings

5.1. Sounds and volume

5.1.1. Ring volume

5.1.2. Ring signals

5.1.3. Mute radio

5.2. Synchronise phone book

Menu structure - BluetoothTM

handsfree with built-in phone

1. Call register

1.1. Last 10 missed calls

1.2. Last 10 received calls

1.3. Last 10 dialled calls

2. Phone book

2.1. Search

2.2. Copy fr. mobile phone

3. Bluetooth

3.1. Remove phone

3.2. Connect fr. mobile phone

3.3. Car Bluetooth info

4. Call options

4.1. Automatic answer

4.2. Voice mail number

5. Change phone

5.1. Carphone

5.2. Add phone

5.37. Added phones 3

3 A maximum of 5 phones.

10 Infotainment system

Bluetooth handsfree*

10

266 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

6. Phone settings

6.1. Sounds and volume

6.1.1. Ring volume

6.1.2. Ring signals

6.1.3. Mute radio

6.2. Synchronise phone book

10 Infotainment system

10

267

268

Type designation................................................................................... 270 Dimensions and weights....................................................................... 272 Engine specifications............................................................................ 275 Engine oil............................................................................................... 276 Fluids and lubricants............................................................................. 278 Fuel....................................................................................................... 280 Electrical system................................................................................... 283 Type approval....................................................................................... 285 Symbols in the display.......................................................................... 286

SPECIF ICATIONS

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

270

11 Specifications

Type designation

11

271

Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facili- tate all contact with a Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories.

Type designation, vehicle identification number, maximum permissible weights, codes for colour and upholstery and type approval number. S40 and V50: The label is visible when the right rear door is opened. C30 and C70: The label is visible when the right door is opened.

Label for parking heater.

Engine code, component and serial num- bers.

Label for engine oil.

Gearbox type designation and serial num- ber:

manual gearbox

, automatic gearbox

VIN number (type and model year desig- nation plus chassis number).

Further information on the car is presented in the registration document.

NOTE

The labels shown in the owner's manual are not provided as exact reproductions of those in the car. The purpose is to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your car in particular is available on the label in question in your car.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

272

Dimensions

Dimensions mm

A Wheelbase 2640

B Length 4476

C Load length, floor, folded seat 1745

D Load length, floor 976

E Load height 441

F Height 1454

G Front track 1535

Dimensions mm

H Rear track 1531

I Load width, floor 1034

J Width 1770

K Width including door mir- rors 2022

Weights

Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full and all fluids.

The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched, see table) influences the payload and is not included in the kerb weight.

Permitted maximum load = Gross vehicle weight - Kerb weight.

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

273

NOTE

The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car with- out extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced cor- respondingly by the weight of the acces- sory.

Examples of accessories that reduce load- ing capacity are the Kinetic/Momentum/ Summum equipment levels, as well as other accessories such as Towbar, Load carriers, Space box, Audio system, Auxiliary lamps, GPS, Fuel-driven heater, Safety grille, Car- pets, Cargo cover, Power seats, etc.

Weighing the car is a certain way of ascer- taining the kerb weight of your own partic- ular car.

WARNING

The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed.

For decal location, see page 270.

Max. total weight

Max. train weight (car+trailer)

Max. front axle load

Max. rear axle load

Equipment level

Max. load: See registration document.

Max. roof load: 75 kg.

Towing capacity and towball load

Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

1.6 1200 50

D2 1300 75

11 Specifications

Dimensions and weights

11

274

Engine Maximum weight, braked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

2.0F 1350 75

2.0 1350

others 1500

Maximum weight, unbraked trailer (kg) Maximum towball load (kg)

700 50

11 Specifications

Engine specifications

11

275

Overview

Engine Engine code

Output (kW/rpm)

Output (hp/rpm)

Torque (Nm/ rpm)

No. of cylinders

Bore (mm)

Stroke (mm)

Swept volume (litres)

Compres- sion ratio

1.6 B4164S3 74/6000 100/6000 150/4000 4 79 81.4 1.596 11.0:1

2.0F B4204S4 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

2.0 B4204S3 107/6000 145/6000 185/4500 4 87 83.1 1.999 10.8:1

T5 B5254T7 169/5000 230/5000 320/1500 5000

5 83 93.2 2.521 9.0:1

D2 D4162T 84/3600 115/3600 270/1750 4 75 88.3 1.560 16.0:1

D3 D5204T5 1103500 150/3500 3

350/1500- 2750

5 81 77.0 1.984 16.5:1

D4 D5204T 130/3500 177/3500 400/1750- 2750

5 81 77.0 1.984 16.5:1

Engine code, component and serial number can be read on the engine, see page 270.

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

276

Adverse driving conditions

Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnor- mally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions.

Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys:

towing a caravan or trailer

in mountainous regions

at high speeds

in temperatures colder than -30 C or hot- ter than +40 C

The above also apply to shorter driving dis- tances at low temperatures.

Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine.

Volvo recommends Castrol oil products.

IMPORTANT

In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service inter- vals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise you will risk affecting service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact.

Volvo Car Corporation disclaims all war- ranty liability if engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used.

Viscosity chart

11 Specifications

Engine oil

11

277

Engine oil grade

Engine var- iant

Engine code Recommended oil grade Volume between

MIN-MAX (litres)

Volume, incl. oil filter

(litres)

1.6 B4164S3 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 5W30

0.8 4.0

2.0F B4204S4 0.8 4.3

2.0 B4204S3 0.8 4.3

1.6D D4162T 1.0 3.8

T5A B5254T7 Oil grade: ACEA A5/B5

Viscosity: SAE 0W-30/5W30

1.3 5.8

D4 D5204T 1.0 5.9

A SAE 0W-30 applies for Europe, SAE 5W-30 applies for other markets

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

278

Overview

IMPORTANT

The recommended transmission fluid must be used to prevent damage to the gearbox. Do not mix with any other transmission fluid. If the transmission is topped up with a dif- ferent fluid, contact a workshop nearby for servicing. Volvo recommends that you con- tact an authorised Volvo workshop.

Gearbox oil

Manual gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

B6 1.6

BOT 350M3 MMT6 1.7

MTX75 1.8

M66 1.9

IB5 2.1 BOT 130 M

Automatic gearbox Volume (litres) Prescribed transmission fluid

MPS6 7.3 BOT 341

AW55-51 7.7 JWS 3309

TF-80SC 7.0 AW1

11 Specifications

Fluids and lubricants

11

279

Fluids

Fluid System Volume (litres) Recommended oil grade

Coolant 1.6 5.8 Coolant recommended by Volvo mixed with 50% waterA, see the packaging. The thermostat starts opening at:

petrol engine (1.6) 82 C

petrol engines 90 C,

diesel engines 82 C

diesel engine (D2) 83 C

2.0 and 2.0F 6.5

T5, manual gearbox 7.0

T5, automatic gearbox 7.5

D2 6.2

D3 and D4 8.5

Refrigerant Air conditioning B R134a (HFC134a)

Oil: PAG

Brake fluid Brake system 0.6 DOT 4+

Power steering fluid Power steering 1,0 1,2 WSS M2C204-A or equivalent product with same specifi- cations.

Washer fluid 4-cyl. Petrol/Diesel 4.0 Use a washer antifreeze recommended by Volvo, mixed with water for temperatures below freezing.

5-cyl. Petrol/Diesel 6.5

Fuel Petrol: 1.6, 2.0, 2.0F approx. 55 Petrol: see page 139

Petrol: T5 approx. 62

Diesel Diesel: D2, D3 and D4 approx. 52 Diesel: see page 140

A Water quality must fulfil the standard STD 1285.1. B Refrigerant quantity varies depending on engine variant. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop for the correct information.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

280

CO2 emissions and fuel consumption

A B C

1.6 220 9.2 139 5.8 169 7.1

2.0FA 260 10.9 138 5.8 183 7.7

2.0 251 10.8 133 5.7 176 7.6

T5 294 12.6 150 6.4 203 8.7

T5 315 13.5 151 6.5 211 9.0

D2 137 5.2 101 3.8 114 4.3

D3 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D3 201 7.6 119 4.5 149 5.6

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

281

A B C

D4 183 7.0 106 4.0 134 5.1

D4 201 7.6 119 4.5 149 5.6

A A Flexifuel vehicle can be driven on any 95 octane unleaded petrol, or bioethanol E85, as well as all possible mixtures of these two fuels. The car consumes 30-40% more of the E85 which has a lower energy content. The precise difference depends on the particular driving style, ambient temperature and variations in fuel specification, amongst other things.

A = urban driving (l/100 km)

B = driving on main roads (l/100 km)

C = combined driving (l/100km)

Fuel consumption and emissions of

carbon dioxide

Fuel consumption and emission values in the table above are based on specific EU cycles1, that apply to cars with kerb weight in the basic version and without extra equipment. The car's weight may increase depending on equipment. This, as well as how heavily the car is loaded, increases fuel consumption and carbon diox- ide emissions.

There are several reasons for increased fuel consumption compared with the table's val- ues. Examples of this are:

The driver's driving style

High speed results in increased wind resis- tance

AC switched on (air conditioning)

Roof load and ski box result in increased wind resistance

Too low air pressure in the tyres

Fuel quality, road and traffic conditions, weather and the condition of the car.

To bear in mind

Large deviations in fuel consumption may arise in a comparison with the EU driving cycles1

which are used in the certification of the car and on which the consumption figures in the table are based. Below are examples of tips that the driver can use in order to reduce con- sumption:

Drive gently.

Drive in the highest gear possible, adapted to the traffic situation and the road you are driving on. Lower engine speeds result in lower fuel consumption.

1 Official fuel consumption figures are based on two standardised driving cycles in a laboratory environment ("EU driving cycles") all in accordance with EU Directive 80/1268/EEC (Euro 4), EU Regulation no 682/2008 (Euro 5) and UN ECE Regulation no 101. The regulations cover the driving cycles for city driving and driving on main roads. - City driving - the measurement starts with cold starting the engine. The driving is simulated. - Driving on main roads - the car is accelerated and braked at speeds between 0-120 km/h. The driving is simulated. The value for combined driving, which is reported in the table, is a combination of city driving and driving on main roads, in accordance with legal requirements. CO2 emissions - the exhaust gases are collected in order to calculate the carbon dioxide emissions during the two driving cycles. These are then analysed and give the value for CO2 emissions.

11 Specifications

Fuel

11

282

Use engine braking to slow down, when it can take place without risk to other road users.

Avoid letting the engine idle for long peri- ods. Pay attention to local traffic regula- tions. Switch off the engine if stationary for longer periods, when this can take place without endangering other road users.

If the car is equipped with an electric engine block heater, always use it before starting from cold.

Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly. Select ECO tyre pressure for best results, see the tyre pressure table on page 187.

Choice of tyres can affect fuel consump- tion. Information on suitable tyres can be given by your dealer.

Extra weight - remove unnecessary items from the car.

Remove the space box directly after use.

Always carry out service and maintenance on the car in accordance with the instruc- tions in the owner's manual.

Even a combination of some of the above- mentioned examples can result in significantly improved consumption.

For further information, please refer to the reg- ulations referred to in accordance with the above.

WARNING

Never switch off the engine while moving, such as downhill, this deactivates important systems such as the power steering and brake servo.

See page 138 for general information on fuel.

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

283

General

The car has a voltage-regulated AC alternator. The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor.

The battery capacity is dependent upon the equipment level in the vehicle. If the starter battery is replaced, therefore, you must ensure that you switch to a battery with the same

capacity as the original battery (see the label on the battery).

Battery

Voltage (V) Cold start capacity,

CCA - Cold Cranking Amperes (A)

Reserve capacity

(minutes)

Capacity (Ah)

12 590 100 60

760 A 120 70

12 700 B 135 80

A Cars equipped with High Performance audio system. B Cars equipped with diesel, keyless drive, Premium Sound audio system, fuel-driven heater or RTI.

Bulbs

Lighting Output (W) Type

Dipped beam, cars with halogen lamps 55 H7

Main beam, cars with halogen lamps 55 H9

Main beam, cars with Dual Xenon or ABL (Active Bending Lights) 55 H7

Brake lights, reversing lamps, rear fog lamp 21 P21W

Front direction indicators, cars with Dual Xenon or halogen, rear direction indicators 21 PY21W

11 Specifications

Electrical system

11

284 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

Lighting Output (W) Type

Front direction indicators, cars with ABL (Active Bending Lights) 24 PY24WSW

Rear position/parking and side marker lamps (upper socket) 5 P21/5W

Rear position/parking lamps (lower socket) 5 R5W

Cargo area lighting, number plate lighting 5 C5W

Vanity mirror* 1.2 Tubular lamp

Front position/parking lamps, front side marker lamps 5 W5W

Fog lamps 35 H8

Glovebox lighting 3 Tubular lamp

11 Specifications

Type approval

11

285

Remote control key system

Country and region

A, B, CY, CZ, D, DK, E, EST, F, FIN, GB, GR, H, I, IRL, L, LT, LV, M, NL, P, PL, S, SK, SLO

Delphi hereby certifies that this remote control key system conforms to the essential char- acteristic require- ments and other rel- evant regulations of directive 1999/5/EC.

IS, LI, N, CH

HR

ROK Delphi 2003-07-15, Germany R- LPD1-03-0151

BR

TW

ETC093LPD0155

Certification of the Keyless Drive system

Siemens VDO Automotive A.G. hereby certifies that this equipment type 5WK4 8952, 5WK48956, 5WK48812 conforms to the essential characteristic requirements and other relevant regulations of Directive 1999/5/EC.

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

286 * Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction.

General

There are a variety of different symbols in the display in the car. The symbols are divided into warning, indicator and information symbols. Shown below are the most common symbols with their meanings and a reference to where in the manual further information can be found. For more information on symbols and text messages, see pages 50 and 54 .

The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety and/or driveability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the informa- tion display at the same time.

The yellow information symbol illumi- nates, in combination with text in the informa- tion display, when a deviation in any of the car's systems has occurred. The yellow symbol information can also illuminate in combination with other symbols.

Symbols in the display

Indicator and warning symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Warning 21, 32, 50, 53, 155

Information 50, 53, 155, 160, 162

Emissions system 50, 51

Fault in the ABS system

51, 52

Rear fog lamp 51

Symbol Meaning Page

Stability system, STC or DSTC*

51, 159, 160

Engine preheater (diesel)

51

Low level in fuel tank

51

Indicator symbol for trailer

52

Parking brake applied

52

Airbags - SRS 21, 52

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

* Option/accessory, for more information, see Introduction. 287

Symbol Meaning Page

Low oil pressure 50, 52

Seatbelt reminder 18, 52

Alternator not charging

52

Fault in brake sys- tem

52, 157

Main beam indi- cator

49

Symbol Meaning Page

Left direction indi- cators

49

Right direction indicators

49

Other information symbols in the

combined instrument panel

Symbol Meaning Page

Rain sensor* 64

Cruise control* 65

Gear shift indica- tor*

151

Information symbols in the centre

console display

Symbol Meaning Page

G 02 12 16

Surround sound (only Premium Sound)

240

G 02 12 21

News 244

G 02 12 22

Programme types 244

G 02 12 23

Regional radio programmes

245

Audio files 247

Directory in CD disc

247

G 02 12 20

Traffic information 244

Phone* 261

Bluetooth TM

handsfree * 261

11 Specifications

Symbols in the display

11

288

Information symbols in the roof console

display

Symbol Meaning Page

Seatbelt reminder 19

Airbag, passen- ger seat, acti- vated

24, 25

Airbag, passen- ger seat, deacti- vated

25

11 Specifications

11

289

12 Alphabetical Index

12

290

A

A/C electronic climate control..................... 93 manual climate control................... 88, 89

ABS fault............................................ 51, 157

Active Bending Lights (ABL)...................... 58

Active headlamps...................................... 58

Adaptation............................................... 149

Additional heater (Diesel)........................... 98

Adjusting headlamp pattern.................... 178 halogen headlamp.............................. 178

AF automatic frequency update........... 245

Airbag........................................................ 22 activating/deactivating, PACOS........... 24 driver's and front passenger side......... 23 key switch off........................................ 24

AIRBAG ..................................................... 22

Airbag system............................................ 22

Air conditioning.......................................... 88 ECC...................................................... 91 general.................................................. 86

Air distribution............................................ 94 ECC...................................................... 92

Air distribution, A/C................................... 89

Air quality system, ECC............................. 92

Air vents..................................................... 87

Alarm........................................................ 130 alarm indicator.................................... 130 arming................................................. 130 automatic alarm activation................. 131 deactivating a triggered alarm............ 131 disarming............................................ 130 RDS traffic warning............................. 244 reduced alarm level............................ 131 testing the alarm system.................... 131

Alcolock................................................... 142

Antenna location, Keyless drive............... 124

Approach light, duration............................ 75 setting................................................... 79

Audio, see also Sound............................. 238

Audio volume phone.......................................... 255, 263 phone/media player............................ 263 programme types............................... 246 ring signal, phone............................... 263

Auto climate control settings........................ 91

AUTO storing stations................................... 242

Auto climate............................................... 91

Automatic car washes............................. 200

Automatic gearbox manual gear positions (Geartronic)..... 152 towing and recovery........................... 166 trailer........................................... 169, 170

Automatic locking.................................... 127

Automatic relocking................................. 126

Autostart.................................................. 146

Auto volume control................................ 241

Auxiliary heater.......................................... 98

Average fuel consumption......................... 61

B

Backrest rear seat, lowering.................... 110

Bag holder............................................... 112

Bass speaker........................................... 239

Battery............................................. 218, 283 changing the battery in the remote con- trol key................................................ 125 maintenance............................... 209, 218 overload.............................................. 137 specifications...................................... 283 start assistance................................... 168 symbols on the battery....................... 218

12 Alphabetical Index

12

291

Bioethanol E85........................................ 139

Blind spot (BLIS)...................................... 163

Blind Spot Information System, BLIS 75, 163

Bluetooth handsfree............................................ 261 mute microphone............................... 262 transfer call to mobile......................... 262

Bonnet, opening...................................... 210

Booster cushion folding up.............................................. 38 lowering................................................ 39

Booster cushion, integrated...................... 38

Boot lid driving with open boot lid................... 136 locking/unlocking........................ 116, 126

Brake and clutch fluid.............................. 216

Brake light.................................................. 59

Brakes anti-lock braking system, ABS........... 157 brake light............................................. 59 Emergency Brake Assistance, EBA ... 158 emergency brake lights...................... 158 handbrake............................................. 69

Brake system........................................... 157

Bulb holder removal............................................... 223

Bulbs changing............................................. 220

Bulbs, see Lighting.......................... 220, 283

C

Calls functions during a call................ 254, 257 incoming............................................. 262 operation..................................... 254, 262 volume in phone................................. 255

Car care................................................... 200

Car care, leather upholstery.................... 202

Cargo area............................................... 112 bag holder........................................... 112 electrical socket.................................. 112 loading................................................ 177 load retaining eyelets.......................... 112

Car settings............................................... 79

Car upholstery......................................... 202

Car wash.................................................. 200

Catalytic converter................................... 139 recovery.............................................. 166

CD discs storage compartment......................... 108

CD functions............................................ 247

Checking and topping up the coolant..... 215

Checks fluids and oils...................................... 213

Children..................................................... 33 child safety locks.......................... 39, 129 child seats and side airbags................. 26 location in the car................................. 33 location in the car, table....................... 34 safety.................................................... 33

Child safety locks.................................... 129

Child seat................................................... 33

Child seats................................................. 33 ISOFIX fixture system for child seats. . . 39

Cigarette lighter socket front seat............................................... 56

Cleaning automatic car washes......................... 200 car wash............................................. 200 rims..................................................... 200 seatbelts..................................... 202, 203 upholstery........................................... 202

12 Alphabetical Index

12

292

Climate control general.................................................. 86 personal preferences............................ 78

Climate control settings auto....................................................... 91

Clock, adjustment...................................... 78

Clutch fluid, checking & topping up........ 216

Coat hanger............................................. 107

Cold start................................................. 154 automatic gearbox.............................. 154

Collision crash mode........................................... 32 inflatable curtain, IC.............................. 28

Colour code, paint................................... 204

Combined instrument panel...................... 49

Compass................................................... 72 calibration............................................. 72 setting the zone.................................... 72

Condensation in headlamps.................... 200

Coolant.................................................... 215

Cooling system........................................ 136

Crash, see Collision................................... 32

Cruise control............................................ 65

D

Deadlocks................................................ 127 deactivation........................................ 127 temporary deactivation....................... 127

Defroster.................................................... 89

Diesel....................................................... 140

Diesel: engine preheater............................ 51

Diesel particle filter.................................. 140

Dipstick, electronic.................................. 214

Direction indicators.................................... 60

Disc text................................................... 248

Disengaging the gear selector inhibitor... 154

Display, messages..................................... 54

Display lighting.......................................... 58

Dolby Surround Pro Logic II............ 237, 240

Door mirrors............................................... 74

Driver's door control panel.................. 48, 70

Driving cooling system.................................... 136 economical......................................... 136 in water............................................... 136 slippery driving conditions.................. 136 with trailer........................................... 169

Driving in water........................................ 136

Driving with a trailer towball load........................................ 272 towing capacity.................................. 272

DSTC, see also Stability control system.. 159

DSTC, see also Stability system symbol.................................................. 51

During a call, functions............................ 257

E

ECC, electronic climate control................. 87

Economical driving.................................. 136

ECO pressure.......................................... 186 table.................................................... 186

Electrical socket cargo area........................................... 112 centre console...................................... 56 rear seat................................................ 56

Electrical system...................................... 283

Emergency calls...................................... 252

Emergency equipment warning triangle.................................. 189

Emergency puncture repair..................... 194

12 Alphabetical Index

12

293

Emission control fault indicator........................................ 51

Engine block heater................................. 148 fuel-driven............................................. 95

Engine compartment............................... 210 coolant................................................ 215 power steering fluid............................ 216

Engine oil......................................... 213, 276 adverse driving conditions.................. 276 capacities........................................... 276 filter..................................................... 212 oil grade.............................................. 276 oil pressure........................................... 52

Engine specifications............................... 275

Entry, keyless............................................. 79

Environmental labelling, FSC, owner's manual....................................................... 15

EON - Enhanced Other Networks............ 246

Equalizer.................................................. 240

Error messages in BLIS........................... 164

Expectant mothers, seatbelt...................... 19

External dimensions................................ 272

F

Fan A/C........................................................ 88 ECC...................................................... 91

Fast-wind................................................. 248

First aid equipment.................................. 191

Flexifuel.................................................... 148 adaptation........................................... 149

Floor mats................................................ 103

Fluids, capacities..................................... 278

Fluids and oils.................................. 212, 278

Fluids and oils, checks, engine compart- ment......................................................... 212

Fluids and oils general............................. 212

Fog lamps rear........................................................ 58

Fog lamps, on/off...................................... 58

Fold down the rear seat backrest ........... 110

Frequency update, automatic.................. 245

Front seats, heated.................................... 89

FSC, environmental labelling..................... 15

Fuel CO2 emissions.................................... 280 consumption....................................... 280 fuel consumption, display..................... 61 fuel economy...................................... 186 fuel filter.............................................. 140 level indicator........................................ 51 parking heater....................................... 95 refuelling............................................. 138

Fuses....................................................... 226 box in the engine compartment.......... 227 changing............................................. 226 general................................................ 226 relay/fuse box in the passenger com- partment............................................. 230

G

Gearbox manual................................................ 151

Gear selector assistance (GSI - Gear shift indicator).................................................. 151

Gear selector inhibitor............................. 153

Geartronic................................................ 152

General information on fuel..................... 138

12 Alphabetical Index

12

294

Glovebox................................................. 107 locking................................................ 118

Gross vehicle weight............................... 272

GSI - Gear shift indicator......................... 151

H

Handbrake................................................. 69

Hazard warning flashers............................ 68

Headlamp pattern adjustment Active Bending Lights (ABL) .............. 178

Headlamps................................................. 57

Head restraint.......................................... 110

Heating front seats....................................... 89, 93 rearview and door mirrors.............. 89, 93 rear window.................................... 89, 93

High-pressure headlamp washing............. 63

HomeLink ................................................ 81

Home safe lighting............................... 60, 75 setting................................................... 79

I

IDIS Intelligent Driver Information Sys- tem........................................................... 252

Ignition keys............................................. 147

IMEI number............................................ 257

Immobiliser...................................... 116, 147

Inflatable Curtain........................................ 28

Information display.................................... 54

Information on fuel................................... 138

Infotainment system menus................................................. 236

Instrument lighting..................................... 58

Instrument overview left-hand drive....................................... 44 right-hand drive.................................... 46

Integrated booster cushion........................ 38

Interior lighting, see Lighting................... 104

Interior rearview mirror............................... 72 automatic dimming............................... 72

Intermittent wiping..................................... 63

iPod , connection................................... 238

ISOFIX fixture system for child seats......... 39

J

Jack......................................................... 190

K

Kerb weight.............................................. 272

Key keyless lock and ignition system........ 122 remote control key.............................. 116

Key blade......................................... 117, 123 active locks......................................... 119

Keyless drive............................ 122, 150, 285 starting the car.................................... 150

Keyless entry............................................. 79

Keyless start (keyless drive)..................... 122

Keypad in the steering wheel...... 65, 67, 253

Key positions........................................... 146

Kick-down automatic gearbox.............................. 153

12 Alphabetical Index

12

295

L

Lambda-sond.......................................... 139

Leather upholstery, washing instructions 202

Lighting Active Xenon headlamps...................... 58 approach light, duration....................... 75 automatic lighting............................... 105 automatic lighting, dipped beam.......... 57 bulbs, specifications........................... 283 dipped beam........................................ 57 display lighting...................................... 58 front fog lamps..................................... 58 headlamp levelling................................ 57 home safe lighting.......................... 60, 75 in passenger compartment................. 104 lighting panel, passenger compart- ment...................................................... 57 main/dipped beam......................... 57, 60 position/parking lamps......................... 57 reading lamps..................................... 104 rear fog lamp........................................ 58

Lighting, bulb replacement...................... 220 cargo area........................................... 224 dipped beam...................................... 221 direction indicators............................. 222 fog lamp.............................................. 223

front.................................................... 220 main beam halogen............................ 221 number plate lighting.......................... 224 parking lamps..................................... 222 position lamps.................................... 222 rear lamp............................................. 224 side marker lamps.............................. 222 vanity mirror........................................ 225

Loading general................................................ 177 load capacity...................................... 177 load retaining eyelets.......................... 112

Load retaining eyelets.............................. 112

Locking.................................................... 123 unlocking............................................ 126

Locking/unlocking................................... 126 inside.................................................. 126 outside................................................ 126

Locks locking................................................ 126

Lubricants................................................ 278

Lubricants, capacities.............................. 278

M

Main/dipped beam, see Lightning............. 57

Main beam flashing................................................. 60

Main beam "flash"..................................... 60

Maintenance............................................ 209 rustproofing........................................ 205 self-maintenance................................ 209

Making calls..................................... 254, 262

Manual gearbox....................................... 151 GSI - Gear shift indicator.................... 151 towing and recovery........................... 166

Manual gear positions (Geartronic).......... 152

Max. roof load ......................................... 272

Memory function in seats........................ 103

Menus audio system...................................... 236

Menu structure.......................................... 78 media player....................................... 250 phone, menu options.......................... 259 phone, overview................................. 258

Messages in BLIS.................................... 164

Messages in the information display......... 54

12 Alphabetical Index

12

296

Meters in the combined instrument panel fuel gauge............................................. 49 outside temperature gauge.................. 49 speedometer......................................... 49 tachometer........................................... 49 trip meter.............................................. 49

Misting attending to the windows..................... 86 condensation in headlamps............... 200 rear window.......................................... 89 removing with defroster function.... 89, 92 timer function.................................. 89, 92

Mobile phone connect............................................... 263 handsfree............................................ 261 register phone..................................... 261

N

News........................................................ 244

O

Oil, see also Engine oil..................... 213, 276

One-key dial............................................. 256

Owner's manual, environmental labelling.. 15

Oxyhydrogen gas.................................... 168

P

PACOS....................................................... 24

PACOS, switch.......................................... 24

Paintwork colour code......................................... 204 damage and touch-up........................ 204

Parking assistance................................... 161 parking assistance sensors................ 162

Parking brake....................................... 52, 69

Parking heater battery and fuel..................................... 95 general.................................................. 95 parking on a hill.................................... 95 symbols and display messages............ 96 time setting........................................... 97

Passenger compartment filter................... 86

Passenger compartment heater fuel-driven............................................. 95

Personal preferences................................. 78 approach light, duration....................... 79 auto blower adjust................................ 78

automatic locking................................. 79 doors unlock......................................... 79 home safe lighting................................ 79 keyless entry......................................... 79 lock confirm. light................................. 79 recirculation timer................................. 78 unlock confirm. light............................. 79

Petrol grade............................................. 139

Phone calling from the phone book............... 256 connect............................................... 263 controls............................................... 253 entering text........................................ 255 handsfree............................................ 261 incoming calls..................................... 262 making calls........................................ 262 on/off.................................................. 254 one-key dial........................................ 256 phone book......................................... 264 phone book, shortcut......................... 264 receiving a call.................................... 262 register phone..................................... 261 standby, standby mode...................... 254 traffic safety........................................ 253

Phone book handling numbers............................... 255

Phone system.......................................... 252

12 Alphabetical Index

12

297

Pinch protection, sunroof.......................... 77

Polishing.................................................. 201

Power seat............................................... 102

Powershift gearbox.......................... 154, 166

Power steering fluid, checking and topping up............................................................. 216

Power sunroof........................................... 76

Power windows......................................... 70 blocking................................................ 71 passenger seat..................................... 71 rear seat................................................ 71

Privacy locking......................................... 120

Programme type...................................... 245

PTY Programme type........................... 244

Puncture, see Tyres......................... 190, 192

Putting calls on hold................................ 254

R

Radio EON.................................................... 246 frequency update................................ 245 news................................................... 244 programme types............................... 243

radio settings...................................... 242 radio stations...................................... 242 REG.................................................... 245

Radio text................................................ 245

Rain sensor................................................ 64

Random, CD and audio files.................... 248

RDS functions.......................................... 243 resetting.............................................. 246

Reading lamps, see Lighting................... 104

Rear seat ................................................. 110

Rearview and door mirrors automatic retracting/extending...... 74, 79 compass............................................... 72 door...................................................... 74 electrically retractable........................... 74 interior................................................... 72

Recirculation A/C........................................................ 88 ECC...................................................... 92

Recommended child seats ....................... 33

Reduced guard settings................................................. 79

Refrigerant................................................. 86

Refuelling fuel cap............................................... 138 fuel filler flap, electrical opening......... 138 refuelling............................................. 138

Refusing a call......................................... 254

REG - Regional radio programmes......... 245

Relay/fuse box: see Fuses....................... 226

Remote control........................................ 116 replacing the battery........................... 125

Remote control, HomeLink programmable ..................................... 81

Remote control key................................. 147 battery replacement............................ 125 detachable key blade......................... 117 functions............................................. 116

Remote control key system, type appro- val............................................................ 285

Resetting the door mirrors......................... 75

Reverse gear inhibitor.............................. 151

Rims cleaning.............................................. 200

Roof load, max. weight ........................... 272

Rustproofing............................................ 205

12 Alphabetical Index

12

298

S

Safety safety systems, table............................ 31

Scan CD and audio files.............................. 248 radio stations...................................... 243

Seatbelt pregnancy............................................. 19 seatbelt tensioner................................. 20

Seatbelt reminder...................................... 19

Seatbelts.................................................... 18

Seats head restraints, rear............................ 110 lowering the rear backrest.................. 110 manual setting.................................... 102 power seat.......................................... 102

Service programme................................. 208

Side airbags............................................... 26

Side airbag SIPS........................................ 26

SIM card.................................................. 252

SIPS bags.................................................. 26

SMS......................................................... 257 read..................................................... 257 write.................................................... 257

Soot filter........................................... 54, 141

Soot filter full............................................ 141

Sound audio settings............................. 238, 239 audio source....................................... 238 volume................................................ 238

Spare wheel............................................. 190 temporary spare......................... 185, 190

Spin control............................................. 159

SRS system general.................................................. 22

Stability and traction control system....... 159

Stains....................................................... 202

Standby, phone....................................... 254

Start assistance....................................... 168

Starting the engine.................................. 146 keyless drive............................... 122, 150

Steering lock............................................ 146

Steering wheel cruise control........................................ 65 keypad.................................... 65, 67, 253 steering wheel adjustment.................... 68

Stone chips and scratches...................... 204

Storage compartment.............................. 106 CD discs............................................. 108

Storage spaces in the passenger compart- ment......................................................... 106

Storing stations, manual and automatic.. 242

Subwoofer............................................... 239

Sun blind.................................................... 74

Sunroof...................................................... 76 opening and closing....................... 76, 77 pinch protection.................................... 77 sunscreen............................................. 77 ventilation position................................ 76

Sunscreen, sunroof.................................... 77

Surround.......................................... 237, 240

Symbols................................................... 160 indicator symbols........................... 51, 52 warning symbols................................... 50

Symbols and display messages parking heater....................................... 96

T

Tank volume............................................ 278

Technical data, engine............................. 275

12 Alphabetical Index

12

299

Temperature actual temperature............................... 87 passenger compartment, electronic cli- mate control.......................................... 93 passenger compartment, manual cli- mate control.......................................... 90

Testing the alarm system......................... 131

Timer A/C........................................................ 89 ECC...................................................... 92

Tools........................................................ 190

Total airing function................................. 127

Towbar, see Towing equipment.............. 171

Towing..................................................... 166 towing eye.......................................... 167

Towing capacity....................................... 272

Towing equipment................................... 171 installation........................................... 173 removing............................................. 175 specifications...................................... 172

Towing eye.............................................. 167

TP Traffic information............................ 244

Traffic information.................................... 244

Trailer....................................................... 169 cable................................................... 171

Trip computer............................................ 61

Tuning Radio............................................ 242

Type approval, remote control key sys- tem........................................................... 285

Type designation..................................... 270

Tyres direction of rotation............................ 185 driving characteristics......................... 182 general................................................ 182 maintenance....................................... 182 pressure...................................... 186, 187 puncture repair................................... 194 specifications...................................... 182 speed ratings...................................... 182 tread wear indicators.......................... 183 winter tyres......................................... 185

U

Unlocking......................................... 123, 126 settings................................................. 79

USB, connection...................................... 238

V

Ventilation.................................................. 87

Vibration damper..................................... 171

Volume audio system...................................... 238 auto volume control............................ 241 media player....................................... 238

W

Warning lamp stability and traction control system. . 159

Warning symbol, airbag system................ 21

Warning triangle....................................... 189

Washer fluid, filling................................... 214

Washers headlamps............................................ 63 washer fluid, filling.............................. 214 windscreen........................................... 63

Water and dirt-repellent coating................ 75

Water-repellent surface, cleaning............ 201

Waxing..................................................... 201

Weights kerb weight......................................... 272

12 Alphabetical Index

12

300

Wheels changing............................................. 192 installation........................................... 193 removal............................................... 192 rims..................................................... 184 snow chains........................................ 184 spare wheel........................................ 190

Whiplash injury.......................................... 29

WHIPS child seat/booster cushion................... 29 whiplash injury...................................... 29

Windscreen wipers.................................... 63 rain sensor............................................ 64

Winter tyres.............................................. 185

Wiper blades............................................ 217 cleaning.............................................. 217 replacing, windscreen......................... 217

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the S40 Volvo works, you can view and download the Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Volvo S40 as well as other Volvo manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Volvo S40. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Volvo S40 Owners Manual 2011 as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.